
Class 

Book._ 

6oipghtN?_ 



CQEXRIGHT DEPOSIT. 



STANDARD TEST 
ENGLISH 



SHEEWIN CODY 



*^S22£*t 




STANDARD TEST 
ENGLISH 

SHERWIN CODY 

II 

Director School of English , Author of "The Art of 
Writing and Speaking the English Language" "100% 
Self- Correcting Course in English" "How to Deal with 
Human Nature in Business" "Commercial Tests and 
How to Use Them" etc. 



JlL 




ASSOCIATION PRESS 

New York: 347 Madison Avenub 
1920 






Copyright, 1920, by 

The International Committee of 

Young Men's Christian Associations 

Incorporating "How to Do Business by Letter" 



©CI.A597943 



CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Preface * v 

National Ability Tests in English vii 

Elementary Grammar Test viii 

Elementary Punctuation Test x 

PART I 

Fundamental Grammar and Punctuation 

Introduction 3 

Chapter I. Capitalization 5 

Chapter II. Punctuation of Sentences 9 

Chapter III. The Use of the Comma 11 

Chapter IV. Other Punctuation Marks 18 

Exercises on Capitalization 25 

Exercises on Sentence Punctuation 28 

Exercises on the Use of the Comma 29 

General Exercises 37 

Advanced Exercises 41 

Review Test on Punctuation 44 

PART II 
Minimum Essentials of Correct Grammatical Usage 

Introduction 51 

Chapter I. Pronouns 53 

Chapter II. Verbs 60 

Chapter III. Nouns 78 

Chapter IV. Adjectives 82 

Chapter V. Adverbs 84 

Chapter VI. Conjunctions and Prepositions 89 

Chapter VII. Miscellaneous Expressions to Avoid 92 

Practice Exercises 97 

Review Check-up Test on Grammar 110 

iii 



iv CONTEXTS 

PART III 

Letter Writing 

PAGE 

Chapter I. Using Words so as to Make People Do Things 121 

Chapter II. How to Begin a Business Letter 124 

Chapter III. How to Close a Business Letter 130 

Chapter IV. The Body of the Letter 136 

Chapter V. Applying for a Position 143 

Chapter VI. Sending Money by Mail 149 

Chapter VII. Ordering Goods 152 

Chapter VIII. "Hurry-up" Letters 156 

Chapter IX. How Money Is Collected 159 

Chapter X. Letters to Ladies 164 

Chapter XI. Professional Letters 168 

Chapter XII. How to Acquire an Easy Style in Letter Writing 174 

Chapter XIII. Two Kinds of Letters — Buying and Selling 180 

Chapter XIV. When to Write a Long Letter and When to 

Write a Short Letter 187 

Chapter XV. Answering Inquiries 193 

Chapter XVI. Talking in a Letter 199 

Exercises in Business Letter Writing 207 

Suggestions on Correspondence Practice 209 

How to Study Business Correspondence 210 

Centering a Typewritten Letter 211 

Note on Pen-written Letters 211 

Facts Required in Different Types of Letters 211 

The National Business Ability Test on Letter Composition. . 213 

How to Fold a Business Letter 220 

Addressing Envelopes 221 

Facsimile Letters to be Answered 223 



PREFACE 

This book is the latest development of a life effort to apply 
the principles of scientific method to the study of language 
and literature. Current teaching of English has been open 
to two serious objections — the work was so indefinite it has 
never been possible to know where the student really stood 
or to measure his progress toward practical efficiency in the 
business world with any exactness; and consequently the 
study has been very distasteful to those who were required 
to take it. Standardized tests make the work definite, and 
as soon as each student knows where he stands and what he 
needs to do, he sets out to reach the goal with enthusiasm 
and determination. 

The opening tests in grammar and punctuation are scien- 
tific measures of practical ability in applying principles in 
everyday practice. The student can see for himself just how 
he measures up, and doesn't feel that after all the result is 
only the opinion of some teacher. Parallel tests, worked out 
for the use of the largest single private employer of stenog- 
raphers in the w^orld, are available through the Business 
Standards Association to measure improvement from month 
to month. 

The exercises in punctuation and the test exercises in 
grammar are intended to give practice on each principle, 
one at a time, to fit for the tests. The most frequently used 
points are covered first, and the aim is to produce correct 
habits. It is not worth nearly as much to know what is right 
and what is wrong as to have the habit of doing the thing 
right, and for the first time a sufficient number of habit- 
forming exercises on the commonest points of grammar and 
punctuation are provided. 

v 



vi STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

These exercises are supplied in pad form as well as in the 
book, so that no time need be wasted in mechanical copying. 
Before study each student can quickly ascertain just what 
he is weak on so he can concentrate on these points. After 
study he should mark the same exercise in another pad, to 
see if he has really mastered the points he missed the first 
time. When he has finished these exercises he should be 
able to pass any standard measurement test at the 100 per 
cent point, since he will have formed correct habits of deal- 
ing with all principles and cases that might be found in any 
such test. 

There is another form of exercise in Part II on Correct 
Grammatical Usage, namely the composition of original 
sentences in which the principle is correctly applied. These 
little sentence compositions are the finest possible prepara- 
tion for actual use of what has been learned in constructive 
writing and talking. 

For practical everyday purposes, the unit of composition 
is the business letter, which is simply a short talk on paper. 
To write a good letter you need to be able to talk it first, 
and talk it just as you would face to face with the person to 
whom you w 7 rite. To see that person sitting by your desk is 
an exercise of the imagination which is essential to the writ- 
ing of natural, easy letters. This is the object of Part III 
of this book. Facsimile letters in the best style are pro- 
vided to be answered, and the text gives five or six letters 
illustrating what the answer ought to be. Questions cover 
the points of correctness and style brought out in the notes, 
and a running review of punctuation and grammar is pro- 
vided to keep fresh in the mind the points already studied. 

A teacher's manual may be obtained from the publishers 
by actual teachers. No teacher should attempt to handle 
this method without the manual. 



NATIONAL ABILITY TESTS IN ENGLISH 

The following tests were first worked out to measure the 
ability in English of employes in such business houses as 
the National Cash Kegister Co., Burroughs Adding Machine 
Co., Swift & Co., The Underwood Typewriter Co., National 
Cloak & Suit Co., Filene's (Boston), etc., where they were 
given experimentally through the courtesy of the employ- 
ment managers. 

Then they were given to some thousands of young people 
in schools, especially to grammar school and high school 
graduates, including the 700 seventh, eighth, and ninth 
grade pupils in Gary and 1,500 in Eacine, by courtesy of the 
superintendents in those cities. They were also given to 
some 10,000 eighth grade graduates in New York City. 

The first thing a student needs to know is on what level 
he stands. Of course the test gives a fair measure only in 
case the key on the back is not looked at before the test is 
taken, and after the test has once been taken, another meas- 
urement requires another test of equal difficulty but fresh 
material. During this course a fresh test should be given 
occasionally, and results compared with the first test to see 
what degree of progress has been made. 



vii 



Elementary Grammar Test 

(Time, 5 mins.) 
Correct the following with pencil on this sheet. Divide 
Par. 1 into sentences, inserting periods and capital letters. 
Cross out wrong forms if choice of two or more is given; write 
in the correct form if all are wrong. If both forms are right, 
leave both. 

1. Once upon a time there was a little chimney-sweep his 
name was Tom that is a short name you have heard it before 
you will not have much trouble in remembering it. 

2. I have (went — gone) to town. 

3. He has (wrote — written) a letter to his mother. 

4. He has (drunk — drank) all the water. 

5. He (did — done) the job yesterday. 

6. I am going with you, (ain't — aren't — what?) I? 

7. I (saw — have seen) him before I saw you. 

8. I (haven't heard — didn't hear) from him yet. 

9. He (has spoken — spoke) to me already. 

10. He (did — has done) the work yesterday. 

11. He (has not spoken — didn't speak) to me so far. 

12. It is (me — I). 

13. It is (they— them). 

14. It is (she — her). 

15. Between you and (me — I). 

16. (Whom — who) will the paper be read by? 

Total Errors 

Standards 
Average grammar school graduates would make. 8 mistakes 

Average high school graduates would make 5 mistakes 

Experienced employes (stenographers) would 

make 3 mistakes 

See key on next page. 



w 



via 



Key to Grammar Test 

I. Once upon a time there was a little chimney-sweep. 
His name was Tom. That is a short name. You have heard 
it before. You will not have much trouble in remembering 
it. (Count one point for each wrong sentence division — four 
points only in this paragraph.) 

The correct word, which should be left after the wrong 
form has been crossed out, is as follows in each sentence: 

2. gone 

3. written 

4. drunk 

5. did 

6. am I not? (must be written in) 

7. saw 

8. have n't heard 

9. has spoken 
10. did 

II. has not spoken 

12. I 

13. they 

14. she 

15. me 
16 whom 

(There are twenty points in all in this test). 



ix 



Elementary Punctuation Test 

(Time, 10 mins.) 

1. Draw a short line under each letter that should be a 
capital, marking directly on this sheet: 

John ^.askam, .esq., was awarded the degree of 11. d. at the 
last commencement of dartmouth college. He is a profes- 
sional bacteriologist in the service of the state of massachusetts, 
i. e., he is employed by the state Jboard of health. In his appoint- 
ments president wilson favored the east rather than the west, 
he wrote for the national educator. 

2. Insert commas where needed: In the course of time, 
when you have grown older and wiser you will find men and 
women who will appreciate your hard work you will get your 
reward and the satisfaction of having done your best will be a 
compensation in itself. 

In the first place if I know anything about John Higgins 
it is morally certain that he was not the thief. However I 
should not advise you to do it for I fully believe you will lose 
money if you do^as the speculation is risky. 

Will you kindly let us know by return mail just when you 
expect to ship our order No. 4568 a No. 46 sideboard r to be sent 
direct to our customer ) James ^akley , Pocahontas ) Mont. Our 
customer wishes to get this sideboard at the earliest possible 
moment and we have promised to hurry it as much as possible. 

Total Errors 

Standards 

Grammar school graduates would make 12 errors 

High school graduates would make 8 errors 

Experienced employees would make . . 8 errors 

See key on next page. 

/ - 

r 



Key to Punctuation Test 

1. The words that should be capitalized are as follows: 
John — Askam — Esq. — LL.D. (notice both Ps capital; if 

wrong, count only one error) — Dartmouth — College — State 
— Massachusetts — State — Board — Health — President — Wil- 
son — East — West — He— National — Educator. 

If any other words have been capitalized, such as "pro- 
fessional bacteriologist/' mark each word as an error. There 
are eighteen words to be capitalized in this part of the test. 

2. Commas should be inserted after the following words : 
time, wiser, work, reward (comma optional here, right 
whether inserted or omitted), place, Higgins, However, it, do, 
No. 4568, Oakley, Pocahontas, moment. 

Commas both before and after "by return mail" should 
not be considered wrong, though a comma only before or 
only after would be wrong. Commas after "order," "side- 
board," and "customer" may be considered optional — not 
wrong if inserted, though it would be better that they should 
not be inserted. Any additional commas (except those rec- 
ognized as optional) should be marked as errors. There 
are twelve points in this part of the test, making a total 
of thirty. 



XI 



PART I 
FUNDAMENTAL GRAMMAR AND PUNCTUATION 



INTRODUCTION 

How to Prepare Lessons on Fundamental Grammar and 

PUNCTUATON 

All rules and definitions of grammar are developed in 
these lessons as needed, on the assumption either that the 
student has never studied grammar before or has forgotten 
what he knew. But definitions and rules are given only when 
they are needed, as for example the distinction between a 
common noun and a proper noun to know when to capitalize. 
The first thing a student needs to know is something about 
sentence structure, and this is best studied in connection with 
dividing language into those standard word groups, phrases, 
clauses, and sentences, by means of punctuation marks. For 
that reason punctuation is taken up before correct gram- 
matical usage, since it gives a practical opportunity to study 
the fundamental formal grammar of sentence structure. 

The author of this book holds that being able to do the 
thing desired is a much better proof of the knowledge of 
principles of grammar than ability to state definitions or 
rules. On that account these have been given very briefly, 
rather for the reference of the teacher than for the study of 
the student, who ought rather to study the many illustrations 
and examples so as to see how the principle works and come 
to understand it that way. 

For the best results the author recommends the following 
method of preparing exercises : 

1. The student should mark a page of exercises on a sheet 
taken from a pad in the class, papers should be exchanged, 
and as the teacher gives the key all errors should be marked. 
Papers should then be returned to the students, who should 

3 



4 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

draw a short line in their bound textbooks under any point 
where an error appears, and also make a small checkmark in 
the first blank checking column. This becomes the assign- 
ment for special study. If there is not time for checking 
papers in the class, the teacher may check errors and return 
papers to students in time for noting errors and preparing 
the next lesson. In all cases the exercise papers should be re- 
turned to the teacher, who will keep them for future ref- 
erence. 

2. After study the student should be given a second exer- 
cise sheet from a pad, which he should mark in the class, and 
which should be corrected in the class with the teacher. In 
this case it is best that students correct their own work, 
and a recitation upon the exercise should be conducted for 
the purpose of discussing all points in regard to it. Exer- 
cises in punctuation should be read aloud, so as to lay 
emphasis on bringing out the meaning by proper word-group- 
ing as shown by the voice in reading as well as by following 
the rules of punctuation. It should be borne in mind that 
rules are only rough helps, to intelligent word-grouping and 
an instinct for exj>ressing the meaning is far better than 
memorizing or mechanically applying rules, all of which 
have their exceptions. Errors made on the second marking 
of the paper should be checked in the second blank column 
both on the pad sheet and in the permanent textbook. These 
errors will call for the most intense future study. 

3. Occasional tests parallel to the National Ability Tests 
with which the course starts are very desirable to measure 
the practical progress made by .the student. 



CHAPTER I 

Capitalization 

1. Nouns. The names of things are called nouns. The name 
of a single person or place, or such a thing as a special news- 
paper or magazine, is called a proper noun } but the general 
name of many things of the same kind is called a common 
noun. 

For example, your name is what? Is it John Walter 
Jones, or Helen Jerome Evans? These are names of single 
persons. But all young persons of the male sex are called 
boys, and young persons of the female sex are called girls. 
Boys and girls are common nouns, but the special names 
are proper nouns. 

Proper nouns and words derived from them are capitalized. 

NAMES OP SINGLE PLACES WORDS DERIVED FROM THEM 

America American, Americanize 

Germany German 

Britain British 

Philadelphia Philadelphian 

France French 

Exercise i, page 25. 

2. Some words are used in two different senses, and so are 
sometimes capitalized and sometimes written with small let- 
ters, according to the meaning. 

When you speak of the direction south, east, west, or 
north, as in the sentence, "The sun rises in the east and sets 
in the west/' no capital letters are required, because there is 
no name of one person or place; but when you speak of that 

5 



6 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

part of the United States that is south of Ohio, as the South, 
or the part of the United States that is west of the Missis- 
sippi Kiver, as the West, or the states along the Atlantic 
Ocean as the East, you make south, west, and east proper 
nouns and must capitalize them, 

When you speak of Fourteenth Street, 'New York City, 
fourteenth and street become the name of one special place 
and must be capitalized. If you speak of Linden Avenue, 
Avenue is part of the name and must be capitalized as much 
as Linden. The Congress of the United States is the official 
name of the body of persons who make the laws for the 
United States, and of course if we say just Congress for short, 
we capitalize the word just the same. But if we say "A con- 
gress of religions will be held in San Francisco," the word 
a before congress shows this is just a common noun, and so 
should not be capitalized. So if we speak of the Chicago 
Association of Commerce we must use capitals, but an asso- 
ciation of commercial men would not be capitalized. What 
word shows it is a common noun? Notice that Street, Ave- 
nue, and River are part of the names Tenth Street, Oak Ave- 
nue, and Hudson River, and must be capitalized. We capital- 
ize all official titles, as John Brown, Esquire; Henry Simp- 
son, President; and titles of books and articles. 

Exercise 2, page 25. 

3. I, meaning the person speaking, is always written as a 
capital, and so is the exclamation 0, but oh is not, except 
at the beginning of a sentence. The names of the days of the 
week (Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday) and the months of the 
year (January, February, March), are capitalized, but 
spring, summer, autumn, and winter are not capitalized. 

Not only do we begin every complete sentence with a 
capital letter, but also every formal quotation (which is one 



CAPITALIZATION 7 

sentence introduced into another sentence), and every line of 
poetry. 

Formerly all words referring to God or Jesus Christ were 
capitalized, as "The Lord is my shepherd, I shall not want ; 
He leadeth me in green pastures and beside the still waters. 
I submit myself to His will." The modern tendency to re- 
duce the use of capital letters has caused many publications 
to cease to capitalize he, his, and him referring to deity. 

It is assumed that these uses of capital letters have been 
sufficiently learned in the elementary grades, but if they have 
not, the best method of learning them is to copy from read- 
ing books, first out of the book and then the same passage 
from dictation. 

4. Special — Advanced* Certain common abbreviations 
are capitalized, such as — Xo. for number (No. 916), C. 0. D. 
(meaning Collect on delivery), MS. (meaning manuscript) , 
Dr. (meaning debtor) and Cr. (meaning creditor), 
A.B. (the degree Bachelor of Arts), AM. (the de- 
gree Master of Arts), Ph. D. (the degree Doctor of 
Philosophy), D.D. (the degree Doctor of Divinity), M.C. 
(meaning Member of Congress), Esq. (for Esquire), St. (for 
Street), Ave. (for Avenue), Co. (for Company in the firm 
names such as "Marshall Brown & Co.," where the short 
form of and is also required), etc. 

But other abbreviations common in business are not cap- 
italized, as pr. (for pair), doz. (for dozen), do. (for ditto or 
the same), etc. (for et cetera, the Latin of and others), 
inst. (for instant meaning this month in the expression on 
the 3rd inst.), i.e. (for the Latin id est or that is), and e.g. 
(for the Latin exempli gratia meaning for example). 

In a bill of goods, either an invoice or an order, the chief 

* The word "advanced" is used to designate such subjects, in a short course, as may be 
omitted the first time over, if time is pressing. 



8 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

words are usually capitalized, though other words are not 
capitalized, as in — 

3 doz. Ladies' Flannel Jackets, No. 913 
1 pr. Buckskin Breeches, No. 14 

4 bbls. Pillsbury's Best Flour, extra fine 

Exercise 3, page 26. 



CHAPTER II 

Punctuation of Sentences 

5. Verbs. Words that assert, command, or question are 
called verbs. These may be simple words such as is, are, 
does, walked, ivrote, or two or more words used together as a 
verb phrase, such as will be, has been, can see, mast have 
gone, will have been tallied (about). 

6. Subjects and Predicates. When a verb asserts some- 
thing about somebody or something, it is called the predicate 
of a sentence, and the noun or other substantive about which 
the assertion is made is called the subject of the sentence. 

John runs (a complete sentence, "John" the subject and 
"runs" the predicate) . 

That little boy named John runs rapidly toward his 
father (a complete sentence with modifiers: "boy," the sim- 
ple subject; "that little boy named John," the complete sub- 
ject; "runs," the simple predicate; "runs rapidly toward 
his father," the complete predicate) . 

"Do this work" is a command ; the verb is imperative, and 
the subject you is always implied — "(You) do this." 

Pronouns are small words that stand for names, and are 
used to avoid repeating the name too many times. They in- 
clude the following : I, ice, you, he, she, it, they, who, which, 
that, those, these — which may be the subject of a sentence as 
well as a noun. 

7. The Sentence the Basis of Punctuation. Punctuation 
is a modern device for arranging words in groups so that 
we may catch their relationships more rapidly as we read 

9 



10 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

than if they were not so divided. The ancients did not use 
punctuation. 

The most important word-group is the sentence. We have 
been taught that a sentence is a group of words that ex- 
presses a single idea ; but ideas run into each other so closely 
that many people have difficulty in deciding where one sen- 
tence ends and another begins. A sentence is really a matter 
of grammar. It is a group of words which has one main 
subject and one main predicate, constituting what is called 
the main clause, together with other possible subjects and 
predicates, constituting coordinate or subordinate clauses, 
which must be connected to the main clause by conjunctions 
(expressed or implied). 

Simple sentences (simple subjects in italics, predicates in 
small capitals) : The lighthouse is a tall building. It has 
a light at the top. This warns the vessels. There is a light- 
house at every dangerous place on the coast. 

Compound sentences (two or more equal clauses) : There 
are twenty-four hours in a day, and every day is divided into * 
two parts called day and night. Day is light, and night is 
dark. Men work in the day, but they sleep in the night. 

Complex sentences (with subordinate clauses) : You ask 
me what / am doing. I reply that / am driving a milk- 
wagon. As long as / remain here, / shall keep this job, 
although / do not like it. 

See that every ordinary sentence begins with a capital let- 
ter and ends with a period if it asserts, a question mark if it 
asks a question, or an exclamation point if it is exclamatory. 

Exercise 4, page 27. 



CHAPTER III 

The Use of the Comma 

8. We use commas to group words inside a sentence, so we 
can see at a glance those which are closely related, and 
separate them from those with which they are less closely 
related. 

9. Compound Sentences. We separate the two clauses of 
a compound sentence by placing a comma between them, be- 
fore the conjunction. And, or, nor, but, are called coor- 
dinate conjunctions, because they connect equal clauses, 
words, and phrases, and one of these will usually be found 
between the clauses of a compound sentence. 

Examples: Your remittance was duly received, and we 
have entered your order for the table. We are sorry indeed 
for the delay in our factory, but we can promise no more 
than to make shipment next week. We will refund your 
money, or you can place an order for another style. We 
greatly regret your inconvenience, we had hoped to ship this 
week, but under the circumstances nothing else is possible. 

Exercise 5, page 28. 

10. // the subject of the second part of the sentence is not 
expressed, we have a compound predicate only, and no 
comma should be placed before the conjunction, except but. 
But nearly always has a comma or semicolon before it. So 
has for. 

Examples: Your remittance was duly received and placed 
to your credit. We are planning to make shipment tomor- 
row and send bill of lading the next day. We greatly regret 

11 



12 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

your inconvenience, but will gladly refund your money if 
you wish. 

Exercise 6, page 29. 

11. Subordinate Clauses. Compound sentences are made 
up of two or more equal clauses connected by coordinate or 
equal conjunctions (and, or, but), but a complex sentence is 
made up of two clauses of which one is subordinate to the 
other or dependent on it. These subordinate clauses are 
always introduced by a subordinate conjunction. 

The commonest subordinate conjunctions are — when, 
ivhere, while, if, unless, ivhether, before, after, until, since, 
because, that, how, why, as, though. 

Who, which, what, and that are subordinate conjunctions, 
and at the same time they take the place of nouns as the 
subjects of sentences, etc. They are called relative pronouns. 

That is sometimes a relative pronoun and sometimes a 
plain subordinate conjunction. 

Usually subordinate clauses are set off from the main 
clause by a comma. 

Examples: When you get to my office, please wait till I 
come. 

Before you go, be sure to give me your address. 

We are attracted by the plan, because it seems likely to 
benefit us both. 

When you have further purchases to make, we shall be 
pleased to have you send us your order. 

We inclose freight receipt, on which the agent at Van- 
dalia has made a statement. 

If he gets here before I do, I wish you would ask him to 
wait for me. 

Unless I hear from you to the contrary, I shall order the 
goods for you next Monday morning. 

Exercise 7> page 30. 



THE USE OF THE COMMA 13 

12. // subordinate clauses are very short and closely con- 
nected in meaning with the main clause, they are not set 
off by commas. If a subordinate clause of whatever descrip- 
tion is so necessary to the meaning that it cannot be omitted 
and still leave complete sense, it is said to be restrictive and 
is not set off by a comma. 

The commonest clauses not set off by commas are those 
beginning with that, as in "I told him that he would fail." 

If you say "The man whom I saw was dressed in khaki" 
the word the indicates a man who must be explained by the 
subordinate clause "whom I saw" in order to make sense. 
But if I say "A man on the street, who looked like John, 
called after me/' the subordinate clause "who looked like 
John" is merely additional explanation and could be dropped 
out without spoiling the sense of what remains. "The man 
was dressed in khaki" would meaning nothing, but "A man 
on the street called after me" would make good sense. 

Examples of short clauses: When I see him I shall tell 
him what you say. (Point out the two subordinate clauses 
in that sentence.) I want to see you before you have dinner. 
We can postpone discussion until we meet again. Unless 
you insist I will refuse to give him the book. 

Exercise 8, page 31. 

Note. When we wish to emphasize the separation between 
clauses, we place a comma between them; when we wish to 
show their close connection, we omit the comma. Thus 
shades of meaning are shown by punctuation, and often the 
same words may be given a different meaning by different 
punctuation. Such words as also, so, therefore, otherwise, 
following, and, or or increase the emphasis and the need of 
a comma or even of a semicolon before the conjunction. 

Exercise 9, page 32. 

13. Participial Phrases. A participle is a form of the 



14 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

verb which may also modify a noun or pronoun, an'd so is 
not a complete verb in itself. There are two participles, the 
present participle ending always in ing, as — doing, walking, 
seeing, thinking, looking, laughing; and the past participle, 
usually ending in ed, as — considered, supposed, liked — 
though a few are irregular, as — written, done, hit, horn, 
bent, built, bought, hurt. 

A participial phrase is a group of words consisting of a 
present or past participle with its modifiers (which are the 
same as those of the regular verb). It is almost equivalent 
to a subordinate clause. 

Sentence with Participial Phrase: Sitting by her side dur- 
ing the illness, I was able to appreciate her character. 

Same Sentence icith Subordinate Clause: As I sat by her 
side during the illness, I was able to appreciate her charac- 
ter. 

Write subordinate clauses corresponding to the participial 
phrases in the following sentences : 

Henry Jones, seriously hurt in the wreck, died before noon. 

Thinking the work finished, I went home early. 

The house was beautiful, although built on the open 
prairie. 

Having done what he could to help me out, he hurried to 
keep his own appointment. 

Seen from a distance, the tower showed remarkable lines 
of beauty. 

Mrs. Durand, married while still very young, was left a 
widow at twenty-four. 

I know a boy named Henry. 

I saw him going past the window. 

At John's house I met Henry Dixon, just come home from 
college. 

Participial phrases are punctuated like the corresponding 



THE USE OF THE COMMA 15 

subordinate clauses, that is, if they can be dropped out 
without spoiling the meaning of the rest of the sentence they 
are usually set off by a comma or commas, but if they are 
very short, or necessary to the meaning of the rest of the 
sentence so that they cannot be omitted and still leave good 
sense, they are not set off by commas. 

Exercise 10, page 33. 

14. A Preposition is a word that connects a noun to some 
other word, and a preposition with its noun (or pronoun) is 
called a prepositional phrase. Some of the common preposi- 
tions are — for, ivith, by, in, on, over, under, through, like, 
from, of, to, before, beyond, without, against, between. 

Examples of Prepositional Phrases: We went through 
the wood, under the bridge, and over the hill, until we came 
to the road that runs by the old farm. 

15. Words and phrases thrown in for additional explana- 
tion are set off by commas. Prepositional phrases out of 
their natural order, nouns thrown in to explain other nouns 
or pronouns (said to be in apposition) , independent words 
like however, too, therefore, including names of persons ad- 
dressed, and other explanatory groups of words come under 
this rule. 

Examples: General Joffre, head of the French Army, is a 
remarkable man. General Mackensen, with a full supply of 
ammunition at last, attacked the Russians all along the 
line. 

Tell me, John, what the man said. However, I did not 
care very much. I should like to go, too. 

With men like that at the head of the army, I would under- 
take any commission. (The natural place for the phrase is 
in the predicate, and there it would not be set off by a 
comma.) 

Exercise 11, page 34. 



16 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

16. Words or groups of words in a series are separated 
by commas. When several words, phrases, or sentences, all 
stand in the same relation and so form a series, they are 
separated by commas unless all are connected by conjunc- 
tions. 

Examples: There is a fine, noble man. It was a hot, sul- 
try, and depressing day. (Notice the comma before and in 
this case. If commas are used at all, the best usage requires 
a comma also before the conjunction.) The struggle was 
long and hard. (No comma is required, because the conjunc- 
tion is sufficient.) It was raining hard, I was carrying an 
umbrella, and Jennie had the baby in her arms. (This is a 
series of sentences.) With a hoe in his hand, a bundle over his 
shoulder, and a smile of freedom on his face, he set out to 
seek his fortune. 

Exercise 12, page 35. 

17. Special Uses of the Comma. A comma is put in the 
place of omitted words, as in "John is tall ; his brother, very 
short." The same principle applies to dates and addresses, 
the items of which should be separated by commas : 

Jan. 10, 1915 (meaning, "in the year 1915"). 

110 West 10th St., Albany, N. Y. (meaning "in the city of 
Albany and in the state of New York"). 

Formal quotations are introduced either by a comma, a 
comma and a dash, or a colon, according to the degree of 
formality. 

Examples: He said, "I like the look of that." 

The mayor then began his speech, saying, — 

"Fellow-citizens, we are face to face with a serious situa- 
tion." 

Then the mayor spoke : "Fellow-citizens, we are face to face 
with a serious situation." 

Exercise 13, page 36. 



THE USE OP THE COMMA 17 

18, Summary of Rules for Use of the Comma. 

Rule i. Words in a series are separated by commas un- 
less conjunctions are used ; but if any commas are used, one 
should be placed before a final conjunction. Sec. 16. 

Rule 2. Subordinate clauses or participial phrases that 
may be omitted without changing the meaning of what re- 
mains should be set off by commas unless very short, but if 
essential to the meaning they cannot be set off. Sees. 11, 12, 
and 13. 

Rule 3. Words and phrases that are thrown in paren- 
thetically or are used independently or are transposed, 
should usually be set off by commas. Sec. 15. 

Rule 4- Place a comma before and or or connecting the 
two parts of a compound sentence (that is, when the subject 
of the second predicate is expressed), and before but intro- 
ducing an additional predicate, whether the subject is ex- 
pressed or not. Sec. 9 and 10. 

Rule 5. The items of an address or date are separated by 
commas. 

Rule 6. A comma may introduce a quotation informally 
and take the place of a period at the end of a quotation if 
the sentence goes on. 

General Rule for the Comma. In general, never use a 
comma which does not help to make the meaning clearer. 

Present-day writing has far less punctuation than that of 
fifty years ago, and no rule is so binding that it may not be 
disregarded if the reader can follow the sense just as well 
without the comma. Punctuation should always add some- 
thing to the meaning, and if it does not, it is better omitted. 



CHAPTER IV 

Other Punctuation Marks 

19. Semicolons and Colons. Semicolons are used to sep- 
arate groups of words which are themselves subdivided by 
commas (they are a sort of superior comma), and before 
but and similar words to separate the parts of compound 
sentences. 

Colons have but two common uses, namely, after such 
words as as folloivs, and after the salutation of a letter 
(Dear Sir, Dear Madam, etc.). 

Example: 

Dear Sir: Please give me your lowest prices on the fol- 
lowing goods: 6 doz. bed sheets, 60 by 90 inches, bleached, 
extra heavy cotton; 5 doz. linen towels, 15 by 30 inches, 
hemstitched ends, medium grade; 12 washcloths, six inches 
square, Turkish toweling; 3 doz. bath towels. 

Special Exercise. Prepare a letter asking prices on fifteen differ- 
ent items of goods, giving under each item exact details of what 
you wish. 
Exercise 18, page 41. 

20. Dashes are used to indicate an abrupt transition, 
when a sentence is partly broken off and then goes on again, 
as in "Send me a nice book for a girl — something like Little 
Women, only new." 

Incomplete sentences in a dialogue show by double dashes 

where a speaker broke off : "You said he " He stopped 

short, mouth open. 

18 



OTHER PUNCTUATION MARKS 19 

Special Exercise. Write the following with the necessary dashes: 
We handle all kinds of groceries canned goods, bulk goods, green 
vegetables, and fruits. There are a hundred and thirty-five pupils 
in the seventh and eighth grades thirty-five in 7A, forty-one in 7B, 
twenty-four in 8A, and thirty-five in 8B. I want a light challis 
dress something very summery. "Don't you dare to cross that 
line" and with that he broke off as suddenly as he had begun. We 
had a fine garden this year plenty of lettuce, radishes, and sweet 
corn. She was very gay what you might call foolishly frisky. "If 
you open your mouth again" But someone clapped a hand over 
his mouth before he had completed his sentence. 

21. Parentheses are used to separate words thrown into 
a sentence for additional explanation when the connection 
is slight. When the connection is fairly close, such words 
are set off by commas. When it is less close, dashes may be 
used, and when the connection is slight, we set the words off 
by marks of parentheses. Words thrown into a quotation 
but not quoted are inclosed in square brackets. Square 
brackets are also used to inclose a parenthesis within a par- 
enthesis. 

Example: Notice the hyphens in cheap-looking and good- 
sized (adjectives combined with participles). 

22. Exclamation Points. These are placed at the end of 
exclamatory sentences, that is, sentences with an exclama- 
tory word in them like how, what, etc., or sentences made 
exclamatory by omission of the subject and predicate; and 
also after interjections that do not form part of an exclama- 
tory sentence with an exclamation point at the end. Only 
one exclamation point should be used for one exclamation. 

Examples: How dark it is! What a beautiful color that 
dress has ! Ah, me ! I do not know what to say. Alas, how 
sad it is to see his fall ! 

What is our assignment today? A hundred complete ma- 
chines ! Six hundred a week ! Thirty thousand a year ! 



20 



STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 



23. Quotation Marks. Words actually quoted from 
somebody else are to be inclosed in quotation marks. This 
includes slang words, for when they are placed in quotation 
marks one says in effect, "I have heard these words used, but 
I do not venture to take any responsibility for them myself." 
A word taken out of a sentence, even one of your own sen- 
tences, may also be indicated as a word taken from another 
connection by quotation marks. You may quote from your- 
self as well as from some one else. 

24. Hyphens are an essential part of such compound 
words as coarse-grained and never-to-be-forgotten, and they 
are used at the ends of lines when words are divided. The 
division can be made only at the end of a syllable. However 
crowded you may be, it is never allowable to divide thing or 
any other long syllable. 

A syllable has one vowel sound, and each distinct vowel 
sound indicates a new syllable. Let us become familiar with 
some common syllables. 



Common Prefixes, or Opening Syllables 



ac — accent 
ad — admit 
ab — abstain 
con — control 
col — collect 
de — deface 
dis — disappear 



ex — extend 
In — install 
per — permit 
post — postpone 
pre — precede 
pro — pronoun 
re — return 



sub — sub-freshman 
trans — transpose 
fore — forego 
mis — missent 
un — undo 
with — withstand 



Common Suffixes, or Closing Syllables 

ing — coming ible — forcible ist — specialist 

tion — nation ment — judgment age — sewage 

er — maker sion — decision ate — placate 

or — error ance — attendance less — careless 



OTHER PUNCTUATION MARKS 21 

ant — tenant ence — dependence ly — carelessly 

ent — confident ous — hideous ure— closure 

able — comfortable tial — partial ness — bareness 

Some Long Words of One Syllable 

strength sought thought 

length knack knuckle 

wretch judge 

fought pledge 

None of these syllables can be divided at the ends of lines. 

Double consonants are divided at the ends of lines, as beg- 
gar, col-lect, ac-centy ac-com-mo-date. 

Short vowel sounds usually require a consonant at the end 
of the syllable, but long vowel sounds close the syllable 
without a consonant. For example, in accommodate 
above, mo is long and so. the hyphen is before the d, 
but in mod-er-ate, the o in mod and the e in er are both short, 
and the hyphen is placed after the consonant. But there is 
considerable irregularity. 

Observe that compound numbers from twenty to a hun- 
dred require a hyphen : twenty-one, forty-five, eighty-nine. 

Note to Teacher: Considerable practice on dividing words into 
syllables (a week's work) is desirable. Dictate the words illus- 
trating the Rules of Spelling on page 23 of the "100% Speller" and 
the Common Words that follow, requiring pupils to place hyphens 
between syllables. When studying the spelling of these words it 
is better for pupils to write them as they will look in ordinary 
composition; but the same words can be rewritten with attention 
focused on the division into syllables. 
Exercise 19, page 42. 

25. Apostrophes. The apostrophe is used before s to indi- 
cate the possessive case of singular nouns, and after the s to 



22 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

indicate the plural form for the plural possessive. Thus we 
write child's, a lady's veil; but ladies' veils (never ladle's, 
since ladie is not a word by itself). Pronouns do not take 
apostrophes. 

The apostrophe also takes the place of omitted letters in 
condensed words. Not is shortened to n't in didn't, isn't, 
doesn't and in such special contractions as don't, can't, and 
won't. It's is the short form of it is, while its without an 
apostrophe is a possessive pronoun. 

Special Exercise. Copy the following correctly: He didnt do the 
work when I told him to, and now he says he wont. Its very im- 
portant that we get it done right away, but I cant do it myself. 
Will you bring along the babies wraps — all of them. I have 
promised the ladies that every babys carriage shall be ready. You 
must also look after the ladies wraps. If you dont I cant say what 
will happen, as its so very important. See particularly that Mrs. 
Smiths baby gets its own carriage. It doesnt do to wait for other 
people to look after such matters. 
Exercise 20, page 43. 



EXERCISES IN PUNCTUATION 



(Patented Oct. 15, 1918; other patents pending) 



Mark the pad only. In the textbook merely check points where 
errors were found when pad was corrected, as an assignment for 
study. 



Exercises i and 2 

(See Sec. i and Sec. 2) 

In the following draw a short line under the first letter of 
each of the proper nouns and words derived from them that 
ought to be capitalized : 

1 I saw helen on the street this morning. She was just 

2 going to Washington to see president wilson, who will make a 

3 speech on the steps of the white house. The name of her own 

4 home is the squirrels. They gave the place that name because 

5 there are so many squirrels in the trees. Her father is to 

6 be employed by the united states government. He was for 

7 merly a british subject, and now he may be sent to england. 

8 If he goes to /ranee he will wish to learn freneh and helen 

9 will be placed in a freneh school. She is already a great 

10 admirer of lafayette, as she learned what he did for arnerica 

11 when she studied the history of the tfnited states. 

— '20 words to be capitalized. 

1 When the south made up its mind to declare its inde- 

2 pendence of the north, the southern confederacy was formed. 

3 Then the president of the united states called on congress to 

4 raise an army to fight for the union. A great army was 

5 gathered on the potoraac river, and every one expected the 

6 soldiers to move southward, but the first southern move- 

7 ment was farther west. 

8 In Washington the secretary of the navy lives at 910 

9 fifteenth street, N. W., and the controller of the currency at 

10 1427 new york avenue. The president's secretary lives in 

11 the suburbs, on a street called southwestern boulevard. 

12 The united states government is founded on the consti- 

13 tution, under which the president and congress operate, 

14 and which is interpreted by the supreme court. Also, every 

15 state has its own legislature and its own supreme court. 

16 I read an article the other day in the ladies' home 

17 journal. It reminded me of another in the new york times, 

18 "one of the important newspapers in new york city, which 

19 had been copied into the racine times-call. It discussed the 

20 army of the united kingdom of great britain, and especially 

21 the fact that the irish have not been forced to serve in it as 

22 have all other people living in the british isles. 

— 51 words to be capitalized. 

Total 

2S 



Exercise 3 

(See Sec. 3) 

Draw a short line under the first letter of words that 
should be capitalized: 

Al John Bolton, esq., m.c, was given the honorary degree of 

2 11. d. at the last commencement of yale university. He was 

3 at the time Chairman of the illinois state board of health, 

4 and previously had filled the office of state veterinarian. He 

5 was a member of many learned societies, such as the na- 

6 tional education association, the american academy of sci 

7 ences, and the american medical association. He had also 

8 written for various national magazines such as the american 

9 inedical journal, the national health review, and the pure 

10 food 'magazine. The president of the united s-tates once 

11 offered him the position of head of the bureau of animal 

12 industry in the department of agriculture, but congress re- 

13 fused to confirm him on account of his strong republican 

14 politics, i. e., the senate thought a democratic president should 

15 not put an active republican into office even if he was a 

16 man of international scientific reputation. He coined the 

17 expressions, service to the state is man's best service to 

18 himself, and, no politics in the nation's business. 

— 48 capital letters to be inserted. 
Bl J. M. Holton, who was acting as adviser on organization 

2 matters for the federal reserve bank of Chicago, has now 

3 been definitely elected organization counsel, with offices in 

4 the equitable building. Henry Holabird, secretary, has been 

5 placed in charge of the new building as chairman of the 

6 planning committee. He also has control of the bond 

7 department. 

8 Esther Maybrick, who was at one time time assistant 

9 stenographer to the committee on immigration of the u. s. 

10 senate, is now acting as private secretary to our president. 

11 Mrs. Jamieson is buyer in the children's undergarment 

12 department of best & co., and is chairman of the employes' 

13 benefit association, which was organized by that firm several 

14 years ago. She buys knit underwear, hosiery, muslin gar- 

15 ments for girls, and underwaists for boys and girls. She 

16 would like to get into the girls' dresses department. 

— 30 capitals to be inserted (3 additional capitals optional.) 

Total 

2Q 



Exercise 4 

(See Sees. 5» 6, and 7) 

Insert capitals, periods, etc. Draw a single line under 
each simple subject and a double line under each predicate.* 



Al A hungry dog once stole a large piece of meat he was 

2 very glad indeed to get the meat he had seized it in his 

3 teeth then he was running away with it on his way he 

4 came to a brook this he started to cross he looked down 

5 he saw another dog with another piece of meat in his 

6 mouth 

7 This piece of meat was just like his own he was a 

8 greedy dog he opened his mouth to snap at the other dog's 
piece of meat his own piece fell into the water it was quickly 
carried beyond his reach he had snapped at his own reflec- 
tion in the water he had neither his own piece of meat nor 
that of the other dog. 

In this world a good many persons are eager to get the 
property of other people as a matter of. fact they usually 
lose their own from neglect or quarreling or greed 

— 17 subjects and predicates. 
Bl Mercury is a remarkable metal it is fluid it is heavier 

2 than iron or lead we can keep mercury in a bottle mercury 

3 is fourteen times heavier than water it is put on the backs 

4 of looking-glasses it reflects pictures like polished silver 

5 We put mercury in thermometers a themometer is a 

6 scale with a tube of mercury on it heat expands the mer- 

7 cury warm air makes the mercury rise cold air makes the 

8 mercury go down in the tube some figures are printed on 
the scale behind the tube these figures tell the degrees of 
temperature water boils at two hundred and twelve degrees 
we print this "212° Fahr. (Fahrenheit)" 

Water is a fluid mercury is also a fluid every other 
heavy metal is a solid 

Why is mercury a remarkable metal is mercury a solid 
metal what will mercury do when spilled how many times 
heavier than water is mercury have you a thermometer at 
home can you tell the amount of warmth in the room by 
the thermometer when does the mercury rise in the tube 

— 26 subjects and predicates. 

Total 

* These are simple sentences, just one subject and one predicate to each sentence. 

27 



Exercise 5 

(See Sees. 8 and 9) 

Divide the following into sentences, beginning each with a 
capital letter and ending it with a period or question mark. 

Then insert the necessary commas between the clauses of 
the compound sentences. 

Identify each clause by finding the simple subject (which 
should have a line drawn under it) and the simple predi- 
cate (which should have two lines drawn under it). Place 
a cross under each conjunction. 

1 Qfijd is called a "precious metal" and so is silver, silver is 

2 white and gold is yellow -silver looks like nickel or tin but 

3 it is heavier than aluminum Jpure silver is not hard enough 

4 for practical purposes and it must be mixed with copper 

5 to make it tough J the cases of some watches are made of 

6 silver but other watches have cases made of gold 

7 Gold and silver are used to make coins but gold money 

8 is not so common as silver v'Aold and silver are brought to 

9 the government mints in bars and there Ihey are made into 

10 money /first the inejal is rolled out then it is cut into pieces 

11 and finally it is stampedj&any ornaments are made of gold 

12 and silver, and we can polish them with chamois, Jewelry is 

13 made of gold and silver and in these metals the jewels are 

14 set 

15 Is your w^tch made of gold ^or is it made of silver is 

16 gold the more precious metal or is silver why must silver 

17 be mixed with copper and hew can you polish silver; how 

18 many cents are there in,a silver dollar and how many dimes 

19 is a silver dollar worth' do you like to go tc) the dentist, and 

20 has the dentist ever put gold in your teethjftrhere is all the 

21 money made and who controls the making 

— 33 subjects and predicates. 

Total 



28 



Exercise 6 

(See Sec. 10) 

Divide the following into sentences, placing a period or 
question mark at the end of each and beginning each with a 
capital letter. Then insert a comma before each coordinate 
conjunction which connects the two clauses of a compound 
sentence, but carefully avoid placing a comma before a con- 
junction which connects the two parts of a compound predi- 
cate, that is, when the predicate has no subject expressed. 
To prove you are right, draw a single line under each simple 
subject and a double line under each simple predicate. Then 
place a cross under each conjunction. 

1 Copper is a heavy metal and is reddish in color, fy does 

2 not rust like iron but will gradually tarnish in the open 

3 air. copper is rather soft, and not at all brittle , and so it can 

4 be pressed easily into the shape of saucepans and kettles, U 

5 is used to form various parts of machinery and tools y but 

6 is too costly to be used in place of iron or steel , copper 

7 makes excellent alloys with many other metals, and it forms 

8 an important part of bronze and of bell metal, in alloy it is 

9 used for small coins like the United States cent, or the 

10 English penny, or we may stamp it easily into the form of 

11 medals or badges # a tough metal like this can be stamped out 

12 very thin and is used to cover rusting metals like iron 

13 Brass is one of the most useful of modern metals, i/i is 

14 an alloy of copper and zinc, but neither of them is so hard 

15 it does not rust like iron and can be used to line pumps and 

16 other articles working in water^it is hard and does not wear 

17 out like copper but. like copper it tarnishes in the open air, 

18 as hollow tubing it is much used in making bedsteads, and 

19 people like the golden yellow color* a thin coating of lacquer 

20 will keep the surface from tarnishing, or for temporary pur 

21 poses ibanana oil may be usedjn time the laccfuer wears off 

22 and then the brass must be repolished and lacquered agair^ 

23 thin plates of brass are often pressed over iron or steel, that 

24 met^a! is stronger and costs much less »the enormous ijise of 

25 copper in making shells for guns has caused the price to 

26 rise very high and this has greatly reduced the use of brass 

27 for beds and the like — 25 subjects and 33 predicates. 

Total 

29 



Exercise 7 

(See Sec. n) 

Divide the following into sentences, setting off each sub- 
ordinate clause by a comma. Find the subordinate conjunc- 
tions or relative pronouns and place a double cross under 
each. Then identify each main and subordinate clause by 
drawing a single line under each simple subject and a double 
line under each simple predicate. 

1 As soon as I heard of Mary's arrival at the house I tele- 

2 phoned her brother Henry to come over we were very much 

3 pleased to see her because she had enlisted as a Red Cross 

4 nurse and was soon to leave for the front her brother 

5 John was already serving as an ambulance driver in France 

6 where she intended to join him as member of a new Ameri- 

7 can hospital unit he had been given honorable mention 

8 by the commanding general who spoke of the Legion of 

9 Honor as the natural- reward for such daring as his she 

10 was crazy to be with him because she is so much interested 

11 in the cause and she wanted to "do her bit" and be near 

12 him at the same time 

13 I have just received a letter from her in which she tells 

14 me all about her special training if I were young like her I 

15 should be tempted to join her it is a splendid thing to serve 

16 one's country especially when it is trying to serve the 

17 cause of liberty unselfishly since I knew of her going I 

18 have talked with three other girls and they are almost 

19 tempted to go with her my friends Henry Mathison and 

20 James Gordon who were my classmates in college will sail 

21 on the same ship though they are not army men they have 

22 been given special commissions in the medical division the 

23 American nurses have not yet been given commissions as 

24 have the women in France and England engaged in nursing 

25 if they had commissions in the United States army they 

26 would certainly be treated better by the foreign women 

27 nurses and if they should be taken prisoners they would be 

28 given the privileges of soldiers however much they wish to 

29 serve their country they ought to be given every advantage 

30 possible — 32 subjects and 33 predicates 

Total 
30 



Exercise 8 

(See Sec. 12) 

Divide the following into sentences. Place a double 
cross under each subordinate conjunction and decide 
whether it should be preceded by a comma. Be prepared to 
give your reason for inserting or omitting the comma. Also 
identify each clause, main and subordinate, by placing a 
single line under the subject and a double line under the 
predicate. Then is not a conjunction, but when is. 

1 Yesterday we went for a picnic to the woods , which we 

2 visited last summer, even before the sun was up Harold and 

3 Ellen were out of bed and getting dressed. as I had packed 

4 our lunch basket the night before we had only to dress and 

5 get our breakfast, I told mother that I would not let the boys 

6 go in swimming } and Ellen promised to see that the girls 

7 did not take off their shoes , mother was afraid that snakes 

8 might bite their feet 

9 When we reached the station at just a quarter to six 

10 whom should we find waiting on the platform but Mrs 

11 Steele with a party of girls, they said that they would like to 

12 join us if we were willing^the oldest girl whom I had known 

13 very well in Dixon was named Mary Parmenter ; and, of 

14 course, we were delighted that we could spend the day to- 

15 gether . before the train pulled in 1 little Henry had broken 

16 his whip and was crying, but I had time to buy him another 

17 I didn't know whether there would be seats for all of us 

18 or not. there were plenty, the train was not as crowded as 

19 it usually is, and we were very comfortable. 

20 It proved to be a very hot day until the wind shifted to 

21 the north. then it turned cool and was delightful until we 

22 left for home before lunch was ready, four of us went for a 

23 boat-ride. we crossed to the wooded island, where that little 

24 brown house stands unoccupied, I was sorry that we did not 

25 all go over there for lunch .after we had eaten everything 

26 that there was, three of the girls lay down and actually went 

27 to sleep, we got home early before father had come from 

28 the city, although we had eaten so heartily all of us were as 

29 hungry as wolves , as soon as dinner was over sleepiness 

30 came on our eyes , and all of us w r ere in bed and asleep by 

31 nine o'clock — 50 subjects and 53 predicates. 

Total 
31 



Exercise 9 

(See Sec. 12 and note following) 

First divide the following into sentences, and then in- 
sert the necessary commas. Give your reason for inserting 
or omitting commas. Identify each subordinate clause by 
making a double cross under the subordinate conjunction or 
relative pronoun which introduces it, and then draw a single 
line under each simple subject and a double line under each 
simple predicate. 

1 Domestic mail matter is divided into four classes , of 

2 which the first includes letters and postal cards > the rate 

3 which applies to the United States applies also to Mexico and 

4 Canada Jhe first class which includes everything on which mes- 

5 sages are written has a rate of two cents an ounce or fraction 

6 thereof , drop letters when they are to be delivered at the post 

7 office .where they are mailed, take a rate of one cent for each 

8 ounce or fraction thereof .this does not apply to offices where 

9 there is a carrier service 

10 Postal cards , which are furnished by the government 

11 cost one cent each or two cents for a double or reply card 

12 post cards, which are printed privately must bear the words 

13 'Tost Card" on the address side and come within a specified 

14 sizejf they comply with these regulations they will be car- 

15 ried for one cenkeacl^by stamp affixed 

16 The second class includes newspapers and periodicals , 

17 which bear the statement "Entered as second-class matter 

18 at the postoffice at " when they are mailed by the 

19 publisher or a news agent ,the rate was formerly one cent a 

20 pound when they are mailed by the general public the rate is 

21 one cent for four ounces \ 

— 24 subjects and 25 predicates. 

Total 



32 



Exercise 10 

(See Sec. 13) 

First insert the necessary punctuation marks and cap- 
ital letters as required by preceding rules. Then draw a 
single line under each simple subject and a double line under 
each simple predicate, and circle each participle in a dis- 
tinct participial phrase. Give the reason for each comma 
inserted or omitted. 



1 Just returned from college , Spencer Smith was the life 

2 of the party . we saw him dancing half the evening with 

3 Gertrude Barnard ,but naturally he was glad to see his cousin 

4 having been away from home for nearly a year 

5 Trained as an athlete possessing vigorous health , and 

6 being clever as well ,he cuts an interesting figure in societv 

7 every one likes him because he is so well bred and well edu- 

8 cated v he has every personal advantage^ and it will be very 

9 strange if he does not make a great business and social 

10 success. 

11 Staying at Spencer's house there is a classmate of his 

12 who is quite different in appearance and manner, left an 

13 orphan by the death of both father and mother when he was 

14 quite small t he has been brought up in the family of an 

15 uncle who does not particularly care for him, seeing him for 

16 the first time ( I was struck by his awkward manners t but I 

17 learned to like him after I had worn his shyness off, liking 

18 to study better than Spencer does . he has gained several 

19 honors in his class-work ^next year he will pay most of his 

20 own expenses v having been awarded the position of keeper 

21 of the art gallery. 

— 20 subjects and predicates. 

Total 



33 



Exercise n 

(See Sees. 14 and 15) 

Punctuate fully, giving special attention to setting off by 
commas the independent, explanatory, or parenthetical 
words and phrases in the following. Make a list of the 
participial phrases, and also of the prepositional phrases. 



1 My father's family was in direct descent from Edward 

2 the Confessor the English king my grandmother on my 

3 mother's side came to Cleveland Ohio as a girl of twenty 

4 just married and made her way to the little country farm 

5 beyond where her husband had built a log cabin 

6 The children were awake now and lay listening in terror 

7 I had toys too heaps and heaps of them and the other 

8 children played with what were left disabled as most of 

9 them were 

10 My aunt climbed to the roof dry as tinder and threw the 

11 water over it 

12 On came the fire like a racing hurricane the strong wind 

13 carrying the sparks about sixty miles an hour 

14 Soon the air was full of dust like fine brown snow 

15 My parents were too much engaged and left to nature 

16 I took things as they came 

17 That garden was my little farm the first real farm I had 

18 ever owned the work of planting and weeding it was real 

19 labor without very much entertainment about it it didn't 

20 cost much however 

21 Stewed with a little butter and a mere pinch of cayenne 

22 pepper and with dry bread broken into them tomatoes seemed 

23 to me the finest thing on earth 

24 While I was never an expert shorthand writer and never 

25 thought very highly of the art still I wouldn't have sacrificed 

26 my experience as secretary my personal contact with these 

27 men for a great deal 

28 However I didn't worry finally by good luck a friend told 

29 me of a good place to work for my board 

Total 
34 



Exercise 12 

(See Sec. 16) 

Punctuate the following fully, giving special atten- 
tion to words, phrases, and clauses in series. Make lists of 
the participial and prepositional phrases. 

1 I know that in the long summer of my first year the 

2 big rustling pine trees the joyous sunshine the music of the 

3 winds and the ozone-laden air left their impress on my 

4 spirit 

5 The three things about this country which stand out 

6 most vividly are the thunderstorms the prairie fires and the 

7 winds 

8 The fine powder sifted into the house into the food into 

9 the beds into all the closets 

10 It was Lizzie who went to school it was Lizzie who 

11 must have the fine dresses and it was Lizzie who had all the 

12 company in the parlor 

13 He had had pneumonia got well and went on fighting 

14 I chased that rooster all around the yard over the garden 

15 behind the barn across the lawn and by the back door 

16 I saw figures in the clouds and sometimes I was in the 

17 midst of building a splendid series of marble palaces all 

18 along the banks of Middle Creek with a big dam that made 

19 a wonderful lagoon and a marble wall all around while in 

20 the castle were beautiful bedrooms one for Aunty one for 

21 Papa one for Mamma one for Grandma and also one for a 

22 pretty little girl in short dresses I felt I needed in that castle 

23 for my amusement 

24 I think I liked Orion best of all for he seemed to me the 

25 calm warrior for ever unmoved calmly steadily shining in 

26 the sky 

27 Three things my mother successfully implanted in my 

28 mind a liking for God a liking for the stars and an aspiring 

29 ambition for myself 

30 What she might have been what she aspired to in her 

31 girlhood all the broad life she would like to have entered 

32 into that her son should be and have he was but the exten- 

33 sion of her life 

34 As we stood on the front doorstep we looked out over 
25 the farmer's joys a big pigpen and cowyard. 

Total 
35 



Exercise 13 

(See Sec. 17) 

In the following insert the proper punctuation, including 
quotation marks : 

1 Write a letter to John B. Masterton 1423 Laurel Ave 

2 Shenandoah Pa telling him to meet me at the Pennsylvania 

3 station Thirty-fourth Street New York tell him I said to you 

4 when John is ready to pay up we will settle our accounts 

5 at once 

6 My address is 910 Twentieth Street Cleveland Ohio and 

7 yours is 910 Tenth Street Cincinnati Ohio 

8 My teacher said to me if you don't get your lesson I 

9 shall keep you after school I replied I shall study as hard as 

10 I can and I can do no more if you study said she you will 

11 get your lesson I assure you 

12 General George Williams visited our school yesterday 

13 he began his address as follows I have not come here to 

14 scold you but rather to rouse your interest to do the national 

15 work which is waiting for you and which you alone can do 

16 His home is on the corner of Sixth Avenue and Four- 

17 teenth Street Des Moines Iowa 

18 When you reach Pasadena California I advise you to 

19 stop over for a day say to the station-master my friend 

20 Hanford Withers told me to mention his name to you and 

21 see what you would say 

22 His letter was dated Thursday January 10 1917 

■ 

Total 



36 



GENERAL EXERCISES— Exercise 14* 

(See Sec. 18 for Summary of Rules for use of the Comma) 

Punctuate the following fully. Place a figure over each 
comma to indicate the number of the rule which applies. 
Draw a single line under each simple subject and two lines 
under each predicate. Place one cross under each coordinate 
conjunction in a compound sentence or predicate, and two 
crosses under each subordinate conjunction. List prepo- 
sitional phrases. 

1 We are very sorry to learn that the goods ordered by 

2 you were not delivered promptly we have made a diligent 

3 search for them but we have failed to find them perhaps they 

4 have already come into your hands if you have not re- 

5 ceived them please repeat the order and we will fill it again 

6 without further delay we sincerely regret the inconvenience 

7 you have suffered and hope that refilling the order will 

8 meet your needs 

9 I have been compelled to purchase a lamp in Brooklyn 

10 I must therefore ask you to refund the amount I paid it was 

11 $4.35. 

12 We are sorry indeed for the inconvenience caused you 

13 by the loss of the lamp we have done everything we can to 

14 trace it but have not yet found it we have not found by 

15 whose fault it was miscarried we inclose our check for $4.35 

16 this was the amount paid by you we trust this accident will 

17 not deter you from giving us your valuable patronage on 

18 future occasions on such occasions we shall hope to be more 

19 forunate in serving you will you kindly sign the inclosed 

20 receipt and return it to us in the inclosed envelope once 

21 more expressing our sincere regret for this unfortunate ex- 

22 perience we beg to remain yours very truly 

23 I am sorry to hear that the instruction cards have not 

24 reached you we are sending you duplicates today however 

25 and trust that they will be received promptly w T e also hope 

26 you will find them all you had anticipated please accept my 

27 sympathy and regret for the mishap for I very well appre- 

28 ciate the annoyance caused you believe me cordially yours 

— 41 predicates, 34 subjects expressed, 7 implied. 

Total 



♦Note. The words "that" and "which" introducing subordinate sentences are often 
omitted, but it is quite clear where they belong. 

37 



Exercise 15 

Punctuate the following fully. Place a figure over each 
comma to indicate the number of the rule which applies. 
Draw a single line under each simple subject and two lines 
under each predicate. Place one cross under each coordinate 
conjunction in a compound sentence or predicate, and two 
crosses under each subordinate conjunction. List prepo 
sitional phrases. 

1 We are very sorry to know of the defect in one of the 

2 books and we hasten to forward another copy by mail today 

3 please do not trouble to return the imperfect volume but 

4 dispose of it as you see fit errors will occur in the bindery 

5 and we can only ask the indulgence of our customers we 

6 regret the annoyance caused you and trust that you will 

7 find the new volume perfect in every way 

8 Thank you for the remittance of $5 and order for a cal- 

9 culator there seems to be a misunderstanding on your part 

10 however in regard to the machine you wish you ordered the 

11 Addington Calculator that costs $15 as you see in the circu- 

12 lar and price-list inclosed we have marked the item in blue 

13 possibly you intended to order the Locke Adder the price 

14 of that is $5 we have checked the description in the circular 

15 shall we send you the Locke Adder or will you remit the 

16 $10 additional that will cover the Addington Calculator we 

17 appreciate your order and trust that the matter may be 

18 adjusted satisfactorily we hold the $5 to your credit 

19 In checking over your bill we find that you have charged 

20 us $8.50 too much your bill is based on the estimate which 

21 we made in advance but the matter did not hold out as 

22 estimated on measuring up the galleys we find but 46,000 

23 ems at 40 cents a thousand that would make $18.40 but your 

24 bill calls for $27 kindly correct the bill and oblige 

25 On looking over your bill I see that you have 

26 charged me on April 18 with an item amounting to $3.25 

27 and have failed to give credit for the goods returned please 

28 look the matter up and send credit memorandum for the 

29 amount on receipt of which your bill will be paid 

— 43 predicates, 33 subjects expressed, 10 implied 

Total 
38 



Exercise 16 
Punctuate the following fully. Place a figure over each 
comma to indicate the number of the rule which applies. 
Draw a single line under each simple subject and two lines 
under each predicate. Place one cross under each coordinate 
conjunction in a compound sentence or predicate, and two 
crosses under each subordinate conjunction. List prepo- 
sitional phrases. # Ml 

1 I am a graduate of Amherst College and had an especially 

2 thorough training in English as private secretary to Hon. 

3 John Hartwell I handled large amounts of correspondence 

4 to the satisfaction of that gentleman and can refer you to 

5 him in 1910 I assumed charge of the advertising of the 

6 Globe Department Store at Peoria and continued in that 

7 position until about six weeks ago I then sold out my interest 

8 and came to Chicago I know very well gentlemen that there 

9 is a wide difference between the Globe Department Store at 

10 Peoria and Marshall Field's in Chicago but I took that store 

11 with business amounting to only $25,000 a year and built 

12 it up till its business last year exceeded $250,000 the present 

13 manager will tell you that my advertising day by day added 

14 to the sales till in 1918 they were more than ten times the 

15 amount in 1910 I feel I have it in me to go on and make 

16 your business grow in the same way and I ask you to give 

17 me a chance to prove my worth I have much to learn but I 

18 am willing to work fourteen hours a day 

19 I wish to apply for the position of correspondent adver- 

20 tised in to-day's Tribune I have had considerable experience 

21 in my father's office where I have answered many letters on 

22 my own responsibility I am a rapid typewriter operator and 

23 am accustomed to writing my own letters on the machine 

24 lawyers for whom I have done copying say that I am re- 

25 markably accurate I have good knowledge of English and 

26 express my ideas readily I am very anxious to obtain a posi- 

27 tion and work for my advancement I have not had as much 

28 experience as I could wish but I feel sure that I can do your 

29 work satisfactorily though possibly I shall be a little slow 

30 at first you can depend on my doing my work faithfully 

31 will you give me a fair trial at any reasonable salary 

— 39 predicates, 32 subjects expressed, 7 implied. 

Total L 
39 



Exercise 17 
Punctuate the following fully. Place a figure over each 
comma to indicate the number of the rule which applies. 
Draw a single line under each simple subject and two lines 
under each predicate. Place one cross under each coordinate 
conjunction in a compound sentence or predicate, and two 
crosses under each subordinate conjunction. List prepo- 
sitional phrases. 

1 More than two weeks have passed and yet we have not 

2 received your invoice or any intimation that the sideboard 

3 has been shipped we confess that we fail wholly to under 

4 stand the meaning of this unexplained and inexcusable delay 

5 we have had repeated complaints from our customer and he 

6 threatens to cancel his order and demand the return of his 

7 money unless the sideboard reaches him within the next 

8 week if Mr. Oakley refuses to receive the sideboard when it 

9 reaches him we shall hold you accountable and charge you 

10 with freight both ways. 

11 You have evidently overlooked our account for which in 

12 the usual course we should have received check on the 15th 

13 if we do not hear from you before we shall draw on you on 

14 the 20th and trust that you will honor the draft 

15 We were disappointed not to receive check from you on 

16 the 20th our outstanding accounts are particularly large at 

17 this season and it is absolutely necessary for us to make 

18 some collections in order to carry out current expenditures 

19 will you not make a special effort to send us some sort of 

20 remittance to help us on our pay-roll Saturday we shall 

21 consider it a favor on your part if you will give this matter 

22 attention 

23 Mr Simpson wishes me to say that he is very sorry indeed 

24 that he was not in his office when you called yesterday he 

25 was away all the forenoon and did not know until this even- 

26 ing that you had called if there is any way in which he can 

27 serve you it will give him great pleasure to do so 

28 I explained your wishes to Mr. Simpson when he re- 

29 turned to the office and he has requested me to say that he is 

30 very sorry indeed but he is quite unable to get passes for 

31 himself he regrets exceedingly that he cannot be of service 

32 to you — 41 predicates; 38 subjects expressed, 3 implied. 

Total 
40 



ADVANCED EXERCISES 
Exercise 18 

(See Sec. 19) 

Insert the necessary commas, semicolons, colons, and any 
other marks required in the following : 

1 Any man can make money if he has — 1. A good thing 

2 to push 2. Big enough margin of profit 3. Protection. 

3 We will supply you everything but the spirit but that 

4 must come from you. 

5 They may fail and they may succeed and no man can 

6 tell in advance what the result will be but it is true of all 

7 business that some ventures pay and some do not. 

8 This provides the machinery for answering all letters 

9 that come in but thousands who do not have this machinery 

10 for answering letters do not go any further that is they 

11 never follow up the inquiries they receive. 

12 I know English is a good thing but I haven't time for 

13 anything that doesn't bear directly on my business. 

14 Time and space are but physiological colors which the 

15 eye makes but the soul is light where it is is day where it 

16 was is night and history is an impertinence and an injury 

17 if it be anything more than a cheerful apologue or parable 

18 of my being and becoming. — Garlyle 

19 Dear Sir Please send us the following goods 1 doz. 

20 Ladies' Handkerchiefs narrow hemstitch plain @ 1.50 

21 1 gross cards Davis's Hooks and Eyes dozen on card @ $1.20 

22 3 doz. papers of Pins size 14 @ 60c Send invoice with goods 

23 Please consider these points 1. Is the proposal safe 

24 2. Can you finance it 3. What will be the profit 

25 Examples Dear Mr, Jones My dear Friend Dear Miss May 

Total 



41 



Exercise 19 

(See Sec. 24) 

Insert hyphens between syllables in the following : 



1. sincerely 

2. gentlemen 

3. possible 

4. address 

5. premium 

6. intere st 

7. yesterday 

8. information 

9. January 

10. experience 

11. association 

12. cordially 

13. referring 

14. appreciate 

15. education 

16. investigate 

17. attention 

18. catalogue 

19. pamphlet 

20. necessary 

21. secretary 

22. distribute 

23. earliest 

24. particular 

25. convenient 

26. importance 

27. measure 

28. position 

29. recent 

30. representative 

31. difference 

32. especially 

33. material 

34. salary 

35. tomorrow 

36. application 

37. assistance 



38. 

39. 

40. 

41. 

42. 

43. 

44. 

45. 

46. 

47. 

48. 

49. 

50. 

51. 

52. 

53. 

54. 

55. 

56. 

57. 

58. 

59. 

60. 

61. 

62. 

63. 

64. 

65. 

66. 

67. 

68. 

69. 

70. 

71. 

72. 

73. 

74. 

42 



direction 

probably 

remember 

signature 

committee 

examination 

finally 

hospital 

illustrate 

practical 

president 

recommend 

reference 

di sap pe ar ance 

disciple 

gasoline 

vinegar 

visitor 

courageous 

serviceable 

acknowledgment 

listening 

peculiar 

decimal 

electricity 

fashionable 

immediately 

miscellaneous 

prejudice 

preparation 

responsible 

situation 

spaghetti 

stationery 

suspicious 

systematic 

temporary 



Total 



Exercise 20 

(See Sees. 19-25) 

Insert in the following the necessary dashes, parentheses, 
exclamation points, brackets, quotation marks, commas, 
and apostrophes. 

1 Did you dig that path? I asked my aunt. One could 

2 tell a woman dug it it is so crooked. 

3 Well she replied its a pity you should lie in bed sick 

4 with the measles while I do all the chores and dig the paths. 

5 If you dont like the way theyre dug you should dig them 

6 yourself. 

7 Oh I wasnt finding fault said I. I was admiring your 
S noble work. Im not finding fault. 
9 Youre not finding fault oh no no indeed. 

10 This conversation took place when we were living at the 

11 old farmhouse in Nebraska the place my father bought for 

12 $7,000 after my mothers death. 

13 Your father owed me one thousand dollars when he died 

14 went on my aunt and he never paid back one red cent not 

15 one red cent and he never will. My aunts favorite phrase 

16 was one red cent I advise you to look around and get some 

17 of that thousand dollars if you can. Your precious mother 
18. with all her brains didnt do it. 

Total 



Note. Continue this exercise by writing from dictation 
extracts from any story containing simple dialogue, first 
copying the passages from the book, then writing them from 
dictation, and finally comparing the version so written with 
the original in the book and correcting. 



43 



REVIEW TEST ON PUNCTUATION 

Capital Letters. Insert the necessary capital letters: 
1. John askam, esq., was awarded the degree of ll.d. at the last 
commencement of dartmouth college. He is a professional bac- 
teriologist in the service of the state of massachusetts, i. e., he is 
employed by the state board of health. 

2. president wilson came from the south originally though 
later he was for many years at the head of princeton college and 
then governor of new jersey. In his appointments he favored 
the east rather more than the west, but the south got about half 
of the cabinet positions — for the first time in recent political 
history. 

3. Send my ms. to the doctor and let him print it, if he 
wishes, in the Christmas number of the national educator. 

4. The company I have always found fairly just to me. I 
have worked for this firm for fifteen years. At one time I was 
sent to the national capital to interview congressmen. 

Total 

Commas. Insert the necessary commas. Indicate by a 
figure the rule that applies : 

5. In the course of time when you have grown older and wiser 
you will find men and women who will appreciate your hard 
work you will get your reward and the satisfaction of having 
done your best will be a compensation in itself. 

6. If however you have not learned your lesson then of 
course you must stay after hours. 

7. In the first place if I know anything about John Higgins 
it is morally certain that he was not the thief. However I should 
not advise you to do it for I fully believe you will lose money if 
you do. 

8. Will you kindly let us know by return mail just when you 
expect to ship our order No. 4568 a No. 46 sideboard to be sent 
direct to our customer James Oakley Pocahontas Mont. Our 
customer wishes to get this sideboard at the earliest possible mo- 
ment and we have promised to hurry it as much as possible. 

9. More than two weeks have passed and yet we have not 
received your invoice or any intimation that the sideboard has 
been shipped. We have had repeated complaints from our cus 
tomer and he threatened in his last letter to cancel his order 
unless the sideboard reaches him next week. 

Total 
44 



Commas. Insert the necessary commas. Indicate by 
figure the rule that applies : 

10. I have carefully considered your application for a posi 
tion in my office and have tried to make a place for you as I 
should be very glad if I might oblige Mrs. Peterson for whom I 
have the highest regard. 

11. At this season of the year however business is slack and 
we have all the help we can make use of for some months to 
come. I have your address and if anything should open up it 
will give me great pleasure to be able to write to you. 

12. If goods are not satisfactory they may be returned at 
our expense. We also ship C. 0. D. with privilege of examination 
but ask the customer to send $1 with his order as a guarantee of 
good faith and an indication that he means business. 

13. We believe that we have the finest goods in our particular 
line to be found in Chicago or anywhere else for that matter. 
You will find us prompt courteous and anxious to do anything 
we can to serve you. Our salesmen and correspondents are in 
any case always at your disposal and we shall be glad at all 
times to give you the fullest possible information or aid you to 
make a choice of the most suitable goods should you feel in doubt. 

14. You will not find anywhere a house that will extend you 
more courtesies or deal by you more fairly nor will you get any 
where prompter service. 

15. We think we have such a tie as you describe in yours of 
yesterday and if you will send us an order with as full a descrip- 
tion as possible of what you want we will exercise our best judg- 
ment and believe we can send you something pretty. In any case 
you know it may be returned if you do not like it and at all 
times we are ready to refund money should you desire that. 

16. Your remittance of $9.65 was duly received and your 
order entered for the table. It happened however that we were 
just out of tables of this style and on account of their patent 
attachment etc. no ether table could be substituted. The factory 
has a new lot of tables in process of making but it takes time 
for the varnish to dry etc. We shall write the factory at once 
however and if shipment has not already been made we will see 
that the table goes forward as soon as possible. 

Total 

45 



1 2 



Commas. Insert the necessary commas. Indicate by a 
figure the rule that applies : 

17. It often happens that a dress does not look the same made 
up as it does in a picture and that the goods have a different 
air which you may not suspect from the sample. The case would 
be just the same however if the dressmaker made the dress in 
your own home for your wife would have to judge of the style 
first by a picture and the goods might not look the same in the 
dress as they did in the piece. 

18. As we state in our catalogue we cannot take back made 
to-order clothing for as it was made to fit one person we cannot 
sell it to any one else and it would practically be a total loss on 
our hands. We do guarantee the fit and workmanship which we 
judge were satisfactory. 

19. We sincerely hope that after a while your wife will like 
her dress better and that you will not hold us responsible for 
what was clearly beyond our power. 

20. I give you the latest and best information on follow- 
up systems how to collect money by mail how to manage agents 
how to deal with women how to write a hundred good letters a 
day when to write a long letter and when to write a short letter 
and fifty other points even more important in short I give you a 
complete system easily learned and applied directly to your every- 
day correspondence to make your letters pull more and more 
with every step you take. 

21. If you had a dictionary at hand at once convenient authori- 
tative and sufficiently complete which would give you what you 
want in half the usual time you would be wiser and more ac- 
curate than you are today. 

22. It is just large enough to fill the hand and hangs on the 
wall in the kitchen store or factory. The powder is far superior 
to water for many reasons. First if a lamp explodes and the oil 
catches fire you cannot put out the blaze with water because 
the oil floats on the water and burns all the more freely second 
you cannot put out any blaze with water unless you have a 
drenching shower and to get that requires time even when you 
have a good hose playing (water puts out fire only where it 
touches and it is not easy to make it touch many spots at one 
time) third water often does far more damage than fire itself 
spoiling wall paper and upholstered furniture carpets etc. 

Total 

46 



The semicolon. Insert commas and semicolons where 
needed in the following: 

23. Please send the following as soon as possible: 1 doz. 
ladies' white linen handkerchiefs the best value you have at 
about 15c each 6 cakes of glycerine soap 15c a cake 6 for 
50c a box of ladies' cream notepaper and envelopes rough 
finish unruled about 25c or any special value you have of this 
grade. 

24. We have suffered a heavy loss on this contract but we 
mind that far less than your annoyance. 

25. Remember I can't teach you how to run your business I 
can't show you how to get dollars from letters dropped into a 
rat-hole but I do know what human nature is and perhaps you 
don't and I do know how to line words up so they will make 
people send you business so far as words will do it. 

Total 



Apostrophes, dashes, quotation marks, exclamation 
points, hyphens, colons, and parentheses. Insert the proper 
marks in the following : 

26. My mother had quite a easeful of books poetry essays his- 
tory and a few stories. 

27. I often saw rattlesnakes in the grass or asleep on the 
warm stone before the front door or on one occasion crawling 
from behind a window sash in my room. 

28. Then the following dialogue took place I have been in 
Attica I said with a naughty smile. Have been in the attic? 
You lie you little vermin. You were not in the attic. I looked 
in the attic myself. 

I said I was in Attica but of course you dont know anything 
about Attica. I wouldnt expect you to. 

I was mad and wouldnt and didnt apologize. I went off to 
a boarders room, forgetful of my mothers warnings. 

29. On the street I met a good looking young woman. May I 
assist you to carry your bag said I. No said she it is not heavy. 
She looked into my face smilingly and I looked into hers. Its 
only a block to the station she said as she went along. I stopped 
and made these notes in my little book 1 fair and tall 2 pleasant 
spoken 3 independent and 4 about nineteen. 

Total 

47 



-L-L 



PAET II 

MINIMUM ESSENTIALS OF CORRECT GRAM- 
MATICAL USAGE 



INTRODUCTION 

How to Study Correct English 

The object of this study is to be able to speak and write 
in the fashion of educated people. Business institutions 
expect their employes to follow this fashion just as much as 
to dress in the prevailing style without being conspicuous or 
extreme. In English one should not be extreme to the point 
of being pedantic or affected, but one may be correct without 
attracting attention, and so win the approval of educated 
people without raising the suspicions of the uneducated. 

Each of the following sections should be taken up in the 
class with the teacher quite fully before exercises are pre- 
pared. Much interest will be added to this class study if 
the group is divided into teams of five or six persons to a 
team, each with a competent leader chosen from among the 
best students. With the book always open before them, 
students should try to compose sentences which illustrate 
the principle, as stated in the exercises in the text Each 
team should be called on in turn, and a score kept on the 
board of the number of sentences that correctly illustrate the 
rule, while two should be deducted for each sentence which 
directly violates the rule. 

Test exercises from the pad, which are also found at the 
end of Part II (see page 99), where the right form and 
wrong form are given to mark out the wrong form, may be 
prepared in the class, where papers should be exchanged and 
errors checked in the first blank column. If any errors at 
all are made it should be assumed that the principle is not 
fully understood and the corresponding sections should be 
carefully studied outside the class. This is best done by 

51 



52 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

writing the sentences called for in the "assignments." In 
the study of correct grammatical usage the pad exercises 
should be handled as briefly in the class as possible, so 
that as much time as may be can be devoted to the writing 
of sentences which illustrate the principles and to the com- 
petition of the teams in checking one another's errors. 

The formation of a Good English Club, whose members 
will correct one another's slips of speech in ordinary con- 
versation, is recommended. The treasury may be replen- 
ished by a system of fines for inadvertent slips, or the teams 
may score against each other by catching members of other 
teams in such slips. Old habits are hard to break without 
prolonged practice and cooperative effort such as has been 
here suggested. 

The largest proportion of errors is probably made on pro- 
nouns, which have accordingly been taken up first. If these 
are fully mastered, probably more than twenty-five per cent 
of all errors of grammar will be removed. Next come verbs. 
A thorough mastery of pronouns and verbs will produce 
more visible improvement of speech than the same amount 
of study spread over the whole subject. The aim in this 
section of our study should be one hundred per cent mastery 
as far as we go. 



CHAPTER I 

Pronouns* 

1. To avoid repeating nouns we may substitute certain 
small words called pronouns. The noun for which a pro- 
noun stands is called its antecedent. 

Personal Pronouns — Accusative 

Nominative (Subjective) (Objective) 

Case Case 

First person (speaking) — I, we me, us 

Second person (spoken to) — you, thou you, thee 

Third person (spoken of) — he, she, it, they him, her, it 

Relative pronouns — who them 

Also — that, what, which (one form whom 

only). 
Other pronouns — this, that, one, each, 

some. 

The following are the possessive (genitive) forms: my 
(mine), our (ours), your (yours), thy (thine), his, her 
(hers), its, their (theirs), whose, one's. 

Examples of pronouns used as subject: My name is I)u- 
rand. I live with my father. He is in business in the city. 
My mother is visiting in the East. She will be at home next 
month. My father and mother say they will send their chil- 
dren to college. 

For what noun does each pronoun stand — that is, what is 
its antecedent? In what case is each pronoun, and why? 

We boys were playing hocky (not "Us boys were play- 
ing"). She and her mother were at the ball (not "Her and 



* See Part I, Sec. 6. 

53 



54 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

her mother were there"). What was it you and Clara and 
I saw Mrs. Fiske in last winter? (not "What was it you and 
Clara and me saw Mrs. Fiske in last winter?"). 

Examples of pronouns used as object of a verb: My father 
met me at the station and I accompanied him home, where 
I met my mother. I kissed her and asked her why she did 
not come to meet me with my father. 

Point out each verb, and then each pronoun that is the ob- 
ject of a verb. In what case is each pronoun, and why? 

Examples of pronouns used after prepositions:* My father 
went with me to the station, where I said goodbye to him. 
My mother said I should have a telegram from her as soon as 
I reached the college. There is a very warm friendship be- 
tween us. 

Point out each preposition and the pronoun following it. 
In what case is each pronoun, and why? 

Special Exercise. Write three sentences in which personal pro- 
nouns which have different forms in the nominative and accusative 
cases are used as subjects (connecting them to other subjects with 
and), three sentences in which the accusative cases are used as 
objects of verbs, and three in which they are used after preposi- 
tions. 

2. Be sure that a pronoun following a preposition or used 
as the object of a verb is always in the accusative case. 

We seldom say, "The work will be done by I," but when 
the pronoun is preceded by and we are very likely to make 
the mistake of saying, "The work will be done by you and I" 
instead of "you and me" as it should be. Or "Your father 
met you and I at the station" instead of "met you and me." 

Between you and me (not "Between you and I"). It is 
a matter for you or him (not "he"). 

Whom will the paper be read by? (not "Who will the 

*See Part I, sec. 14. 



PRONOUNS 55 

paper be read by?" for the relative pronoun is governed by 
the preposition at the end of the sentence). Whom will you 
see today? (not "Who will you see?"). 

Does that rule apply to us older boys? (not u to we older 
boys"). Is everybody going, including him and her? (not 
"including he and she"). 

Special. Let you and me go to the postoffice (not "Let's 
you and I go," for this is equivalent to "Let us you and I 
go," in which us is superfluous and / in the wrong case). 
Make him and her do the work (not "him and she"). (The 
pronouns in these sentences are not precisely the objects of 
the main verbs, but the subjects of the infinitive verbs [to] 
go, [to] do which follow them; but the principle is exactly 
the same.) 

Assignment i. In the list of pronouns you will find five which 
have accusative forms different from the nominative forms. Com- 
pose twenty complete, original sentences in which you use each of 
these five pronouns after ten or more different prepositions (see 
list in Section 14 of Part I), in every case being sure that and or or 
precedes the pronoun which follows the preposition. 

Then write ten sentences in which these five pronouns are 
used as the objects of verbs, and are preceded by and. Compose 
two sentences beginning with let and two beginning with make, 
similar to the illustrations above. 

For example, Will you come with Henry and me? Give it to 
her or him. By whom will the work be done? It will be done by 
him and me. It will be done by John and him. I will work you 
and him till both of you are tired to death. 

3. Verbs which assert that the noun or pronoun following 
the verb is exactly the same or equal to the subject of the 
verb, are followed by the nominative case, called the predi- 
cate nominative. These verbs are forms of to be (is, are, am, 
have been, will be, etc.), to appear, to seem, and such forms 
as is supposed to be, is thought to be, is believed to be. 



56 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

It is I (not "It is me") ; It is he (not "It is him") ; It 
is they (not "It is them") ; It is she (not "It is her") ; It 
is we (not "It is us"). 

Assignment 2. These forms are most naturally used in answer 
to questions, as: Was that his employer? That was he. Were 
those the men you saw? Those were they. Looking through the 
glass, can you make out who it is? That appears to be she. Were 
those men the robbers? The men they caught seemed to be they. 
Without using is as the verb or it as the subject, compose five 
sentences in which you use 7 as a predicate nominative, five with 
he, five with she, five with we, and five with they. Use each of the 
verbs mentioned above, and change the subject of each sentence. In 
each case write also the question to which the sentence is the 
answer. 

4. When a pronoun follows a subordinate conjunction 
such as as, than, etc., it is in the nominative case, if a verb 
is implied of which it should be the subject; but if the im- 
plied verb is such that the pronoun should be its object, the 
pronoun is in the accusative case. Ahvays fill in the verb 
and see what the case should be. 

There is no one who can rim so fast as he (can) ; No one 
there was handsomer than he (was) ; She liked no one better 
than (she liked) him. 

Assignment 3. Write twenty entirely different sentences in 
which the five personal pronouns with different forms in the nom- 
inative and accusative are used after as and than. These may best 
be answers to questions, as — Do you stand higher in the class than 
Helen? Yes, I stand higher than she (stands). Do you like John 
as well as Dorothy? Yes, I like him as well as (I like) her. 
Write questions before each sentence, and supply the missing verb 
in parenthesis. 

5. Pronouns must agree with their antecedents in person 
and number (that is ? if the noun for which the pronoun 
stands indicates one person or thing and so is singular, the 



PRONOUNS 57 

pronoun referring to it must be singular, and if the noun 
indicates more than one and so is plural, the pronoun that 
stands for it must be plural in form). 

Look at the pronouns in Section I and make a list of those 
which are singular, and another list of those which are 
plural. 

Each of them and every one of them are always singular, 
because these words refer to several taken one at a time. 

Each of them has his own way of doing it (not "their 
own way"). The company ordered its men to leave (not 
"their men"). One likes to have one's own way, or his own 
way (not "their own way") . Everybody does as he likes (not 
"as they like"). Every man, woman, and child bowed his 
head (not "their heads"). 

I, who am above you, sacrifice myself for you (not "who 
are above you," for "who" is in the first person to agree with 
"I"). Thou, who art my shield and protector, wilt never fail 
me ("who" is second person). 

// the antecedents are one masculine {referring to hoy or 
man) and one feminine {referring to girl or woman), they 
are referred to in the singular by the masculine pronoun his. 

Each boy and girl in this class has his lesson to learn 
("his" refers to both sexes). Every boy and girl in this 
class has his lesson to learn. All the boys and girls in this 
class have their lessons to learn. Everybody is doing his 
best today. Somebody left his book here. 

The school maintains its average. The football team has 
received its uniforms. The members of the football team 
have received their uniforms. It's for you, who were first in 
the class record last month. It's for me, who am at the head 
of the class. This book is for him who does his best this 
week. I have a red ribbon for him or her who spells every 
word correctly. 



58 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Assignment 4. Write three different sentences, each with a 
different verb, in which I is the antecedent of who and who is fol- 
lowed by a verb which has a different form in the first person and 
in the third person; also three sentences in which you is the ante- 
cedent, of the same sort. 

Then write five sentences in which each is used alone or with 
a noun, and a pronoun later in the sentence refers to this ante- 
cedent, and five sentences in which every is connected with the 
antecedent and a pronoun later in the sentences refers to it. 

Write ten sentences, all different, illustrating the reference of 
pronouns in each of the other ways shown above. 

6. Two singular nouns connected by and form a plural 
antecedent, hut two singular antecedents connected by or 
form a singular antecedent. 

Here are two apples. This one and that one taken together 
are more than one (plural) , but this one or that one is only 
one at a time. 

Which of the two, John or Henry, has learned his lessons? 
Jane and Mary will be found at their home in the country, 
where they have gone for their vacations. Is it Jane or 
Mary who cut her thumb ? 

Either Jenny or John or Molly has lost his pocketbook, for 
here it is (not "lost their poeketbook"). 

This is one of the awkward necessities of the English 
language. 

Assignment 5. Write ten sentences in pairs, the first of the 
pair containing two or more nouns connected by and referred to by 
a plural pronoun and the second of the pair the same nouns con- 
nected by or and referred to by a singular pronoun. 

Then write five in which singular pronouns refer to mascu- 
line and feminine antecedents together. 

Note A. Advanced.* The prize will be won by who- 



*The word "advanced" is used to designate such subjects, in a short course, as may be 
omitted the first time over, if time is pressing. 



PRONOUNS 59 

ever scores highest in the examination and in daily work 
(not "by whomever") : this is clear if we supply the ante- 
cedent him — "won by (him) whoever scores." Of course 
whoever must be in the nominative case as the subject of 
scores. 

Special Exercise. Write a sentence with whoever the subject of 
a subordinate sentence, another with whoever as a predicate nom- 
inative, a third with whomever as the object of a verb, a fourth 
with whomever after a preposition, and a fifth with whoever the 
subject of a subordinate sentence though it appears to be object 
of a verb (like the above, only without the preposition before 
whoever). 



CHAPTER II 



Verbs* 



7. Words that assert, command, or question are called 
verbs. The pronouns in the following conjugation show the 
person and number of the verb. 

Forms of the Verb to be 
Present Tense (time) Past Tense 
I am I was 

you were 

he was 

we were 

you were 



you are 
he is 
we are 
you are 
they are 



they were 



Future Tense 
I shall be 
you will be 
he will be 
we shall be 
you will be 
they will be 



I have done 
you have done 
he has done 



Perfect Tenses of to do 

I had done I shall have done 

you had done you will have done 

he had done he will have done 



Regular verbs change form only in the third person singu- 
lar of the present tense — she does, he goes, it happens. 

The past tense regularly ends in ed — / jumped, you 
jumped, he jumped, they jumped; but not always, as — they 
went, it flew. 

Several words going to make up a full verb, like shall have 
done, form a verb phrase. 

Participles are part verb, part adjective or noun, They 
cannot form a regular predicate. 



* See Part I, Sees. 5 and 6. 



60 



VERBS 61 

Present participles (always end in ing) — being, doing, 
seeing. 

Past participles (regularly end in ed) — loved, killed, 
shielded. Irregular past participles are — been, had, done, 
gone, sent, broken, etc. 

The past participle is also used after to be and to have, 
to form verb phrases, as illustrated above. 

Infinitives are forms of verbs used to complete regular 
verbs, or as nouns, the sign of the infinitive being to: to do, 
to be, to have done, to be killed. 

8. Every verb must agree with its subject in person and 
number. Two singular subjects connected by and form a 
plural; two singular subjects connected by or form a singu- 
lar subject; tchen subjects are connected by or, the verb 
agrees with the nearest. 

Every one of those men has (not, have, since the subject is 
one, not men, which is governed by the preposition of) a 
pickax. Each of the thousand tiny points of life is as clear 
as a star (not are. since the subject is each and intervening 
plurals make no difference with the verb). Jack and I are 
going to the ball. Jack or I am going to the ball. Jack or 
you are on the bill, I forget which it is. The woman or 
the tiger comes out, but Stockton could not tell which. 

Neither of us two was there (not "were there"). Either 
of those two boys knows the answer. The main part of this 
machine is the big rollers (not a are the big rollers"). 

All members of the class are handing in their papers. 
Each member of the class or every member of the class is 
handing in his paper. These questions are addressed to 
Team Five. John or Mary or Henry or Josie or Mabel is 
permitted to answer, but all the rest of you are to keep 
quiet. 

Xow, you boys and girls and I are going to study this to- 



62 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

getlier. Now, are you boys and girls or I going to study 
this together? Either you boys and girls or I am going to 
find these illustrations. (In the first we have a plural, in 
the second are is nearest boys and girls, but in the third am 
is required because the verb comes nearest /.) 

Assignment 6. Write twenty-six sentences with verbs in the 
present tense so as to show a difference between the singular and 
the plural, two sentences like each illustration above. Carefully 
retain the key words every, each, two nouns connected by and, two 
nouns or pronouns connected by or, and two nouns showing different 
sexes. Change the subjects and change the verbs in the illustrative 
sentences. 

Assignment 7. Make three sentences with each of the follow- 
ing subjects, using a verb in the present tense that will show the 
difference between singular and plural: One of the great essentials 
in carrying on all kinds of studies; Mamie Brown, together with six 
other girls and five boys; Each of the sixteen companies of soldiers 
and three companies of artillery; Several of the sixteen companies 
of soldiers; Every one of the forty seventh-grade boys, the thirty- 
five eighth-grade boys, and the A division of girls; The President's 
guard, including Major-General Wood, Major-General Pershing, 
Colonel Lansing, Major Downing, and Lieutenant-Colonel Joslyn; 
Harry Bunting, along with Joe Bicknel, James Ford, and Harold 
Jones; The first essential in choosing your studies in the various 
high school courses; Captain Jones, as well as all the sailors. 

9. In conversation or conversational letter writing such 
contractions as doesn't, don't, and isn't are allowable, but 
ain't is purely a vulgarism and is never to be used. Many 
people confuse don't and doesn't. While they would not say 
"He do not do it," they insist on saying u He don't do it" 
(the contraction of do not) instead of "He doesn't do it" 
(the proper contraction for does not). Am not has no con- 
traction and we must say, "I am going to town with you to- 
day, am I not? ,? (Never "aren't I?" as no one would ever 
think of saying "I are going to town"). 



VERBS 63 

He doesn't like my style (not "He don't like"). It doesn't 
do to speak too freely (not "It don't do to speak too freely") . 

The book doesn't lie flat. The books don't lie flat. 
Such boys aren't learning their lessons. Such a boy isn't 
learning his lesson. Don't they like arithmetic? Doesn't 
this class like arithmetic? Isn't their team going to the 
city Saturday? Xo, it isn't. Xo, they aren't. Am I not 
going too? I am going too, am I not? 

Assignment 8. Write five sentences using don't properly, five 
using doesn't, five using isn't, and five using am I not. 

Note B. From this point on, any boy or girl in the class 
who uses ain't in any connection, at any time during the day, 
should be reported by members of other teams and two 
points should be deducted from the standing score of the 
team to which he or she belongs. The teacher may decree 
the same rule as applying to any other very common error 
which pupils persist in making. 

10. Advanced. Collective subjects are to be treated as 
singular or plural according as the writer has in mind the 
various individuals as a group or as a consolidated body. 

The company is going to raise our pay. The factory says 
it hasn't got it. An army of men were filling the square, or 
An army of men was filling the square (according as you 
think of the single body composing an army, or use army as 
meaning a great many men). An army is encamped in the 
plain (here there is no doubt that army is singular). 

A few men are running across the campus (a few is 
always plural). A number of men are running across the 
campus (the idea is clearly plural, though some critics insist 
that a number must be singular). A certain number of men 
is selected each year (here the reference seems to be more 



64 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

clearly to the singular idea of one number). A large num- 
ber of us are going to the picnic (clearly plural). 

None of those women are dressed for a shower. None of 
the critics of our day is equal to Sainte Beuve. (None is sin- 
gular or plural according as it is intended to suggest the 
last group of objects or persons, or the last individual.) 

In the use of firm names there is much confusion in regard 
to the verb, whether it should be singular or plural. Mont- 
gomery Ward & Co. seems to be plural, because there is one 
man with a Company as partners, while The Montgomery 
Ward Co. seems to be singular. The company, the factory, 
etc., should always be treated as singular, because the sug- 
gests a single corporation; yet there is a suggestion of a 
plural idea in all the people engaged in doing the work of 
the company, various persons being responsible, though it is 
impossible to tell just who it is. In reality it is the com- 
pany as a corporate unit that acts through its various ser- 
vants, so, though many persons labor, it is the company that 
acts. Firm names, however, seem to imply clearly a limited 
number of partners, and the plural is used as if we said the 
partners act in every act of every employe. 

Assignment 9. Advanced. Compose three sentences with each 
of the following subjects which clearly suggest a singular idea, and 
three which clearly suggest a plural idea, being sure to use a verb 
which indicates singular or plural: Company (of soldiers), company 
(a business firm), army, a number, none, people, class, congrega- 
tion, community. Compose three sentences with each of the following 
as subject: The J. Pierpont Morgan Company, J. Pierpont Morgan 
& Co., the factory, United States. 

Note C. Advanced. Some nouns ending in s are really 
singular and require a singular verb. Politics is, athletics 
is, the news is. Tidings come or comes (the word is plural, 
but often used as a singular). Pinchers are, nuptials are 



VERBS 65 

(always used in the plural in modern times), assets are. 
Means may be either singular or plural and we may say 
by this means or by these means according to the meaning. 
Ten dollars is high (a single sum of money). 

Special Exercise. Use each of the preceding italicized words 
three times in a sentence with a verb which will show the singular 
or plural. 

11-. The Past Tense and the Past Participle. As we have 
already seen in Section 7, both the past tense and the past 
participle end regularly in ed. Example of ixist tense: He 
married my sister. Example of past participle: He was mar- 
ried to my sister. He has married my sister. The auxiliary 
verbs was and has (or any other forms of the same verbs 
such as is, are, ivere, will be; have, had, will have) require 
the past participle to complete their meaning. The past 
tense of the verb is complete in itself and has no auxiliary. 

Have with the past participle forms the perfect tenses, 
and be with the past participle forms the passive voice. 

In the case of the regular verbs there is no danger of con- 
fusion, since both the past participle and the past tense are 
the same. But in the case of some irregular verbs the past 
tense and the past participle are different, and confusion in 
their use arises. 

Past tense: I did it (not "I done it"). He began his work 
today (not "He begun his work"). Hilda saw the picture 
(not "Hilda* seen the picture"). The horse drank the water 
(not "The horse drunk the water"). 

Past participle: The man has gone away (not "The man 
has went away"). The hat has blown off (not "The hat has 
blew off"). The man with the horse and buggy has driven 
by (not "The man with the horse and buggy has drove by"). 
I have written a letter to my mother (not "I have wrote a 



66 



STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 



letter to my mother"). Then a song was sung (not "was 
sang"). 

Here is a list of irregular verbs on which there is danger 
of confusing the past tense and the past participle. These 
three forms are called the principal parts: 



Present tense 


Past tense 




Past participle 


arise 


arose 




arisen 


awake 


awoke or i 


awaked 


awaked 


bear 


bore 




borne 


blow 


blew 




blown 


come 


came 




come 


choose 


chose 




chosen 


do 


did 




done 


draw 


drew 




drawn 


drink 


drank 




drunk 


drive 


drove 




driven 


eat 


ate 




eaten 


fall 


fell 




fallen 


fly 


flew 




flown 


give 


gave 




given 


go 


went 




gone 


grow 


grew 




grown 


know 


knew 




known 


lie 


lay 




lain 


lay 


laid 




laid 


ride 


rode 




ridden 


ring 


rang or rung 


rung 


rise 


rose 




risen 


run 


ran 




run 


see 


saw 




seen 


shake 


shook 




shaken 


shrink 


shrank or 


shrunk 


shrunk 



VERBS 



€7 



sing 

sink 

speak 

spring 

steal 

swim 

take 

tear 

throw 

weave 

write 



sang or 


sung 


sung 


sank or 


sunk 


sunk 


spoke 




spoken 


sprang 


or sprung 


sprung 


stole 




stolen 


swam or swum 


swum 


took 




taken 


tore 




torn 


threw 




thrown 


wove 




woven 


wrote 




written 



Assignment 10. Write one sentence in which the past tense 
of each of the irregular verbs given above is correctly used in the 
past tense. 

Assignment n. Write one sentence in which the past participle 
of each of these irregular verbs is correctly used after some form 
of to be or to have. 

Assignments 12 and 13. Write a sentence in which the past 
tense of each of the verbs above is correctly used, and then change 
the same sentence so as to use the past participle correctly. Half 
of the verbs may be taken for the first exercise and half for the 
second. The sentences should be entirely different from those 
written for Assignments 10 and 11. 



Note D. Such forms as teached and catched are never to 
be used. Should they be used by any pupil in any class or 
on the playground, the matter should be reported so that 
two may be deducted from the score of the team to which 
that pupil belongs. The same rule should apply to use of the 
present tense w T hen the past tense is required, as in "He give 
me the apple yesterday" or "I says to him, says I/' and bust 
for burst (as in "I have busted a button off" for "I have 
burst"). 



68 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

12. Verb Forms Often Confused. Because of similarity 

of sound a few verbs are confused with each other or with 

other words. 

Of confused with have: I would have come if I could (not 
"I would of come"). 

Except confused with accept: We accept a present or money 
(not "We except"). Except is correctly used in — Every 
one must do the lesson over except May. I except her 
because she had every sentence right today. 

Lie and lay: There are two distinct verbs, lay, laid, laid, and 
lie, lay, lain. Notice that the past tense of lie is the same 
as the present tense of lay. Lay always requires an ob- 
ject — it is w r hat is called a transitive verb, from Latin 
trans meaning over, suggesting that the action goes over 
to an object. We must always lay something — I lay my 
hat on the table, He lays his book flat, He laid the poor 
bird in her nest, He has laid the poker by the fire. But 
lie is an intransitive verb and cannot take an object. 
We lie down ourselves, Yesterday we lay down, We have 
lain in bed all night (never "We have laid down," as 
there must always be something that is laid dow r n ) . 

Bit and set: Set is another transitive verb and requires an 
object. We set the pail on the floor now, We set the 
pail there yesterday, We have set it there already (all 
forms of set are the same). But sit is an intransitive 
verb and does not take an object. We sit by the fire. 
Yesterday we sat by the fire. We have sat by the fire 
all the morning. 

Let and leave: Always say, Let me go (never "Leave me 
go"). 

Rise and raise: Raise is another transitive verb and re- 
quires an object, we must raise something ; but rise is 
an intransitive verb and cannot take an object. You 



VERBS 69 

raise your arm, but, You yourself rise. A rai«e in salary 
is correct, because someone else has raised your salary. 

Fly, flow, flee, overflow: The confusion is chiefly in regard 
to the form of the past participle. The bird flies and has 
flown. The river flows, and has flowed or has overflowed 
its banks (never overflown). A robber flees from the 
police, and he has fled (never "He has flown from the 
police"). 

May and can: When you ask permission, say "May I go out 
•to get a drink?" "Can I go out to get drink?" would 
mean, "Have I two legs so that I am able to walk 
through the door to the place where the water is?" 

Lose and loose: You lose (pronounced with a z sound) your 
book, but, Your handkerchief lies loose on the table 
(loose pronounced with the sound of s, and it is an ad- 
jective, not a verb), or, A rope hangs loose. 

Assignment 14. Write twenty-four sentences in which each 
of the special words given above is used, each verb used in the 
present tense, in the past, and in the perfect. 

Shall and Will 

To express mere future time use shall after the first per- 
sonal pronouns I and we, will after all other pronouns and 
all nouns. 

But if the speaker exercises his will, or shows willingness 
or determination, we do just the opposite. 

Examples: We shall be among the first to reach the 
ball. 

We will buy tickets (are willing to buy tickets) if others 
are doing it. 

I will do it anyway (I am determined to do it). 

He shall go to school this morning (I will make him go). 

Have you heard the story of the Frenchman who fell into 



70 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

the water and cried out, "Help, help! I will be drowned. 
Xobody shall save nie"? 

In questions use the same form you expect in the answer. 
The same rule applies to indirect quotations. 

Examples: Shall you go to the city tomorrow? Answer, 
I shall go. 

Shall you make your boy study Latin? Answer, I shall 
make him study it. 

He says he shall like the work immensely (that is, he 
really said "I shall like the work"). 

Should and would follow the same rule. 

Always say, "I shall be very glad to see you" (it is absurd 
to say "I will be very glad"). 

I should like to go with you (not "I would like to go with 
you"). 

We should be very glad to accommodate you in this mat- 
ter (not "We would be very glad"). 



Assignment 15. Advanced. Copy the following sentences, 
using the right form: 

I think I (will — shall) be there at twelve. 

(Shall — will) we meet at the big store? 

I have made up my mind that he (will — shall) stay in school 
another year. 

We (will — shall) do whatever you wish. 

Helen and John said they (should — would) come to the dance 
tonight. (What did they really say? — two forms with what differ- 
ent meanings?) 

(Should — would) you like a cup of coffee? 

What (shall — will) you give to the Red Cross? (What is the 
answer expected?) 

Did he say he (should — would) come home directly? (What 
were his exact words?) 

Compose three sentences like each of the preceding examples 
in this exercise, changing the pronouns or substituting nouns 



VERBS 71 

wherever you can, but being sure that your sentences illustrate the 
principle. 

13. The past tense is required with an adverb or phrase 
which fixes a definite time wholly in the past, the perfect 
tense tvith an adverb or phrase ichich indicates times extend- 
ing up to the present. 

He wrote to me yesterday (not "He has written to me 
yesterday"). I saw him in 1901 (not "I have seen him in 
1901"). I saw him before I saw you (not "I have seen him 
before I saw you" ) . I was told after I left you (not "I have 
been told after I left you" ; but "I have been told since I 
left you" is correct). I haven't heard from him yet (not 
kk I didn't hear from him yet"). I have heard since I saw 
you (not "I heard since I saw you.") He has done it al- 
ready (not "He did it already"). He hasn't spoken to me 
about it so far (not "He didn't speak to me about it so 
far"). 

Assignment 16. Write three sentences in which a past tense 
is properly used with yesterday, three with a past date, three 
with after, three with before. Then write three sentences in which 
the perfect tense is correctly used with since, three with yet, three 
with already, three with so far. Repeat this exercise the next day. 
Do not use any of the verbs or any of the subjects given in the illus- 
trations above. 

14. Sequence of Tenses. Advanced. In subordinate 
clauses the tense of the verb should indicate the time cor- 
rectly with reference to the tense of the verb in the main 
clause. The same rule applies to infinitives. 

I see the monument every time I go to town. 

I saw the monument every time I went to town. 

I have seen the monument every time I have gone to town. 

He told me he would come over. 



72 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

He tells me he ivill come over in the morning. 

It would have been unfortunate for him to have done so. 

Say, I very much wished to do it (not "I very much 
wished to have done it," since we wish forward and not back- 
ward, and the tense of the infinitive must be true to facts 
from the point of view of the time of the main verb). 

Say, I should have liked to do it (not "I should like to 
have done it," since as in the case of wishing we like forward 
and not backward ) . 

Rule. The infinitive is present when the time intended is 
the same as that of the main verb or in the future with refer- 
ence to this main verb ; but it is perfect if the infinitive indi- 
cates action or state of being that is complete at the time 
shown by the main verb. 

Say, The lecturer said that it is ten miles from Chicago to 
Evanston (not "that it was ten miles," since of course the 
distance is just the same now as it was then). 

Rule. Universal truths, that is, statements that are just 
as true at all times, past, present, and future, are always 
put in the present tense, even when the sequence of tenses 
would seem to require the past or perfect tense. 

Assignment 17. Rewrite the following sentences with the cor- 
rect form: 

Helen told me she (will — would) meet me at the pier. 

Mrs. Jones came up just as my mother (was — is) going out. 

Most children wish they (could — can) learn their lessons easily. 

Did you expect to (meet — have met) John last night? 

Franklin was the first to say that honesty (was — is) the best 
policy. 

He told me the work was (to be done — to have been done) this 
morning. 

On June 10 I (shall be — shall have been) here a month. 

The textbook stated that it (was — is) never correct to say 
"Between you and I." 



VERBS 73 

Helen very much wished (to go— to have gone) to the dance 
last night. 

What did you say the street number (was — is) ? 

Compose two sentences similar to each sentence in the first 
part of this exercise. 

15. Mode. Advanced. Plain asserting verbs are said to 
be in the indicative mode, as "He does his work well/' "Mrs. 
Smith gave me the book." 

Commands are expressed by the imperative mode, as 
"Give me the book/' "Let him do it." The subject you is 
always implied. 

The subjunctive mode is very little used in English, but 
is used to express a supposed case contrary to fact or a wish 
(which is of course contrary to fact at the present time, 
since we do not wish for that which we actually have). 

The present tense of the subjunctive, which is seldom used, 
omits the s in the third person singular (subjunctive, If he 
like, If she like, instead of // he or she likes), and in the past 
tense the irregular verb to be has If I ivere, If he, she, or it 
were, instead of If / was, If he was). 

Wishes: 

Would I were an angel! 

He wished he were at home. 

Supposed Cases: 

If he were here I should be happy. If I thought it were 
true I would go at once. The grasshoppers formed a huge 
cloud, as it were. 

Notice that the main clause in the first two sentences 
above has the main verb with should or would, and it is clear 
that what is supposed in the if-clause is contrary to fact — 
that he is not here, that I do not think it is true. 

Matters of Fact: 

If Anna is here, she will be sure to find me. If Anna 



74 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

was on the train, be must have seen her. Unless he has 
done it, he will not be punished. 

In these sentences the main verbs are will be, must have 
been, tcill be punished (making definite statements, not ex- 
pressing supposed cases), and there is nothing to show that 
the cases mentioned are absolutely contrary to fact. The 
word if always expresses doubt — it may be or it may not 
be; but when the subjunctive is used we know clearly that 
the supposed case is not true, there is no doubt about it, 

Additional Illustrations: 

"If I were to throw this ball out of the window, would you 
jump after it?" clearly implies that I am not going to throw 
it out. 

"If I throw this ball out of the window, will you jump 
after it?" indicates that I may or I may not throw it — there 
is a choice between two facts. 

"If I were you, I would learn my lessons." Of course I 
am not you. 

"Though he were a genius, he couldn't have played the 
game better." Of course he is not a genius. 

"If he were not a genius, he wouldn't have played like 
that." He is a genius and the supposition that he is not a 
genius is contrary to fact. 

"Unless a man were unusually strong, he couldn't stand 
such work." Here there is no question of fact involved — 
the statement is a general supposition. 

Assignment 18. Advanced. Compose ten sentences in which 
there is a supposed case contrary to fact, and a subjunctive form 
that is different from the indicative is required, and ten sentences 
with if, unless, though which require the indicative form of the 
same verbs. Also write five sentences expressing wishes in which a 
regular subjunctive form is used. 



VERBS 75 

16. The Participial Phrase. Advanced. We have already 
seen* that a participial phrase is like a subordinate clause, 
only what would be the subject of the verb must be the noun 
or pronoun which the participle modifies. There is always 
danger of getting the participle too far away from this noun 
or pronoun, or losing it altogether. 

The subordinate clause — When I reached home, I found 
the house was deserted. 

The participial phrase — Having reached home, I was sur- 
prised to find the house deserted. (Having modifies I— I 
having reached, When I reached. / is really the subject of 
the verb action in having.) On reaching home, I was sur- 
prised to find the house deserted. (Here the participle be- 
comes a noun after the preposition on. We call this verbal 
noun a gerund. It is still necessary that we should not be 
in doubt as to who does the reaching, and that the subject 
of the verb action be definitely expressed near by.) 

Wrong form — Having reached home, what was my sur- 
prise to find the house deserted, or, On reaching home, the 
house was found to be deserted. (In both of the preceding 
sentences you cannot find the I who did the reaching, and so 
the sentences are illogical.) This is called the dangling 
participle. 

Having done all he could, he ordered the freight agent to 
send the box ahead (not "Having done all he could, the box 
svas ordered sent ahead''). While sitting on my doorstep, 
I caught sight of a beautiful butterfly (not "While sitting on 
my doorstep, a beautiful butterfly caught my eye"). Hav- 
ing done all you can, leave the matter in the hands of Provi- 
dence (not "Having done all you can, Providence may be 
trusted to do the rest"). By doing so he will clear the mat- 
ter up (not "By doing so the matter will be cleared up by 

* See Part I, Sec. 13. 



76 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

hirn"). On weighing the sugar we found a shortage (not, 
"On weighing the sugar, a shortage was found"). Referring 
to your letter of yesterday, we would say that the catalogue 
has been sent (not "Referring to your letter, the catalogue 
has been sent"). 

What is the subject of the verb action in each of the par- 
ticiples in the preceding illustrations? In each case ask the 
question, "Who did the having?" "Who did the sitting?" 
If he did it, having must be near he so you can see the con- 
nection. If / was sitting on my doorstep, sitting should be 
near / so any one can see the connection. 

Assignment 19. Advanced. From the following pairs of sen- 
tences choose the one that is right, and give your reason, as illus- 
trated above: 

1. Coming into the room, I found my wife and another lady 
— On coming into the room, my wife and another lady stood before 
me. 

2. Smelling the odor of the dinner that was cooking, it seemed 
evident that we were going to have a splendid feast — Smelling the 
odor of the dinner that was cooking, we saw it was evident that we 
were going to have a splendid feast. 

3. Rising from the settee, it made a grating noise — Rising from 
the settee, I noticed that it made a grating noise. 

4. When writing a check, space should never be left in which 
additional figures can be written — When writing a check, never 
leave space where additional figures can be written. 

5. After collecting your facts and ascertaining your competition, 
your material for a sales letter is ready — After collecting your 
facts and ascertaining your competition, you have your material 
ready for a sales letter. 

6. Any newspaper or magazine picture may be shown in the 
reflectoscope, but it must be clamped in the holder before placing 
in the lantern — before you place it in the lantern. 

7. Looking through the window, a high wind seemed to be blow- 
ing — Looking through the window, I saw that a high wind was. 
blowing. 



VERBS 77 

8. After walking a few steps, my rubbers came off — After walk- 
ing a few steps, I noticed that my rubbers had come off. 

9. After telling him ail I knew about it, he gave me the rest 
of the details — After telling him all I knew about it, I got the rest 
of the details from him. 

10. Living a quiet life in the country, good health was general 
in our family — Living a quiet life in the country, the members of 
our family generally enjoyed good health. 

Compose ten sentences similar to the preceding, and point 
out just what is the subject of the verb action in the participle. 

17. Advanced. When a participle used as a verbal noun 
(gerund) follows a preposition or is object of a verb and its 
logical subject is expressed, that subject mast be in the 
possessive (genitive) case, not in the accusative. 

I hardly knew what to make of that man's jumping over 
the fence (not u Of that man jumping over the fence"). I 
saw him doing it (here the object of saw is him). I approve 
his doing it (here the object of approve is doing, and "ap- 
prove of him doing it" would be wrong) . What do you think 
of my going to town today (not "What do you think of me 
going to town"). I heartily approve the church's acting 
now (not "Of the church acting now"). 

18. Advanced. When an inanimate object would become 
a possessive, the verbal noun should give way to some other 
construction. See Section 23. 

Congress received a report on whether Washington Monu- 
ment should be placed south of the White House (not, "On 
Washington Monument being placed south of the White 
House"). 

Assignment 20. Advanced. Write two sentences like each of 
the illustrations in Sections 17 and 18, and explain just how they 
illustrate the principles stated. 



CHAPTER III 

Nouns* 

19. Nouns change form only for the plural and the pos- 
sessive. The plural is regularly formed by adding s, the 
singular possessive by adding an apostrophe and s, and the 
plural possessive by adding simply an apostrophe to the 
s indicating the plural. But there are some exceptions 
which we should notice. 

Plurals: 

1. If a word already ends in an s sound, es, making a new 
syllable, is added : churches, glasses, changes. Es is also 
added to a few words ending in o, as tomatoes, potatoes, vol- 
canoes, but not to others, as pianos, zeros, cameos. 

2. Y following a consonant is changed to ies, as in ladies, 
babies, fairies; but if a vowel precedes the y it is not 
changed, as in valleys, attorneys, turkeys, displays, convoys. 

3. A number of words ending in f change the f to ves: 
selves, leaves, shelves, wives, knives, thieves, calves, wolves, 
loaves, beeves, elves; but we have chiefs, handkerchiefs. 

4. Seven nouns change the vowel to form the plural: men, 
women, feet, mice, geese, teeth, lice; and three form their 
plural in en: oxen, children, brethren (or bi^others). 

5. Some compounds form the plural by adding s to the 
principal words : sons-in-law, fathers-in-law, passers-by ; but 
words ending in ful add s : cupfuls, handfuls. 

6. A few words have the same form in the plural as in 
the singular : sheep, deer, trout. 

* See Part I, Sees. 1 and 6. 

78 



NOUNS 



79 



Advanced: 7. Some 


foreign nouns retain the foreign 


plural : 




Singular: 


Plural: 


phenomenon 


phenomena 


alumnus 


alumni 


alumna (woman) 


alumnae 


datum 


data 


stratum 


strata or stratums 


beau 


beaux or beaus 


formula 


formulae or formulas 


memorandum 


memoranda or memoran- 




dums 


analysis 


analyses 


crisis 


crises 


basis 


bases 


oasis 


oases 



8. Some nouns take a double plural : menservants, Knights 
Templars. 

9. Physics, ethics, politics, news, athletics, apparently 
plural, are really singular. 

10. The plural of letters and signs is formed by adding an 
apostrophe and s : a's, 2's, c's. 

11. A few nouns have two plurals with different meanings : 
people or peoples (meaning nations), dies (stamps) or dice 
(for gaming), pennies (coins) or pence (sum of money). 

Assignment 21. Write sentences in which each of the illus- 
trative plurals in paragraphs 1 to 6 inclusive are used in both the 
singular and the plural. Several may be combined into one sentence 
if good sense can be made in that way. 

Assignment 22. Advanced. Write sentences in which each of 
the words given in paragraphs 7 to 11 inclusive (both singular and 
plural) are correctly used. If necessary, look up in the dictionary 
such words as you do not know the meaning of. 



80 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

20. Possessives. The singular possessive is regularly 
formed by adding an apostrophe and s, even when the word 
ends in s, as Dickens's, Jones's, though some people omit the 
s and write Jones', Dickens'. The plural possessive is formed 
by adding an apostrophe to the plural s, as babies' frocks 
(be very careful not to write babie^s, an impossible word). 
Plurals that do not end in s take an apostrophe followed by 
s, like a singular: men's, children's. 

21. When two possessives are coupled together, the sign 
of the possessive {genitive) case mfist follow each if each 
possesses individually, but only the last if the two possess 
together. 

John and Mary's house now came in sight (house belongs 
to both together). I picked up somebody's hat, either 
Fanny's or Jenny's. 

22. Several icords used as a phrase may have the posses- 
sive sign at the end. 

His grandfather cleaned the Duke of Wellington's boots. 
This was William the Conqueror's Bible. We came to the 
captain of the guard's house. This is somebody else's book 
(better than "somebody's else book"). 

23. Only animate beings, and especially persons, are usu- 
ally put in the possessive (genitive) case. An inanimate 
object is personified by being put in the possessive. 

I was frightened at the length of that lesson (not "At that 
lesson's length"). He was investigating the drainage system 
of Chicago (not "Chicago's drainage system," for personifi- 
cation would be out of place here) . He spoke of the fertility 
of the land (not "Of the land's fertility"). Exceptions: 
The day's work; the year's returns; Life's journeys; The 
sun's brightness ; For goodness' sake ; Art for art's sake. 

Assignment 23. As only the names of living beings, and such 
words as are personified or represented as if they were living, can 



NOUNS 81 

be in the possessive (genitive) case, only a few nouns are properly 
written that way. Go over the list of nouns illustrating the plurals 
and pick out such as may be properly written as possessives, and 
write them in both the singular and the plural with the possessive 
sign. There are twenty-nine, counting only one form for each word. 
Assignment 24. Write sentences correctly using each of the 
following words either in the possessive (genitive) case or in a 
phrase with 0/, as the character of the word requires: doctor, friend, 
women, Miss Jones, gentlemen, madam, board of directors, education, 
question, daughters, catalogues, ladies, teacher, course of study, 
generals, summer, representative, Mrs. Smith, book, president, rela- 
tive, government, musician, squirrel, vinegar, village, audience, 
autumn, feet, voice, bicycle, biscuit, butcher, canyon, cashiers, 
Christians, cousin, college, customer, czar, decision, description. 

Note E. Observe that pronouns never take an apostrophe 
to denote the possessive : Its, his, her, hers, your, yours, them- 
selves (never in the possessive form), our, ours, their, theirs. 
Any case of an apostrophe in connection with the possessive 
of a pronoun should be reported and two deducted from the 
score of the team to which the pupil belongs. 

24. Advanced. When a verbal noun (gerund) is preceded 
by the or a it must be followed by of, and when followed by 
of it must be preceded by an article. 

.The building of the ship (not "The building the ship"). 
It is the using of it before most (not "The using it before 
most" j . I could not help doing it (not "Doing of it," unless 
you say, "The doing of it"). 

Assignment 25. Advanced. Compose ten sentences using a 
verbal noun (gerund) preceded by a or the, and ten sentences in 
which a verbal noun is used without a or the before it, illustrating 
the necessity for omitting of. 



CHAPTER IV 

Adjectives 

25. A word which modifies a noun or pronoun is called 
an adjective. Examples: A red wagon, a happy child, splen- 
did colors, perfect lessons. A phrase that modifies a noun 
is called an adjective phrase, and a clause that modifies 
a noun is called an adjective clause. 

Examples: He was a man of straw. The stick, being 
round, would not go into the square hole. 

When a verb asserts that the quality belongs to the noun, 
the adjective used in the predicate is called a predicate ad- 
jective. Examples: The apples are red. The statement seems 
to be true. 

Possessive forms of nouns and pronouns are said to be 
used as adjectives (because they modify nouns and pro- 
nouns) without being strictly adjectives. Examples: That 
man's coat is on fire. He gave me his book. 

26. Comparative and Superlative Forms. A child may be 
happy (positive degree), happier (comparative degree), or 
happiest (superlative degree). 

When adding er and est is awkward, we use more and 
most: splendid (positive), more splendid (comparative), 
most splendid (superlative). 

A few adjectives are compared irregularly : good, better, 
best; bad, worse, worst; many, more, most. 

If a thing is perfect, round, complete, it cannot be more 
so, but may be more nearly perfect, more nearly round, more 
nearly complete. 

82 



ADJECTIVES 83 

Assignment 26. Write the comparative and superlative forms 
of the following words and use each in a sentence: ready, straight, 
sincere, respectful, new, cordial, favorable, early, certain, complete, 
circular, sorry, convenient, important, pretty, probable, final, plain, 
pleasant, athletic. 

27. The adjectives this and that have these and those as 
plural forms, which can he used only with plural nouns. 

I do not like that kind of apples (not "Those kind of 
apples"). You have been playing these two hours (not 
"This two hours"). I can't tolerate that sort of people (not 
"I can't tolerate those sort of people"). 

Note F. Some children have the bad habit of saying them 
apples instead of these apples or those apples. They also 
stick here needlessly after this and there after that, say- 
ing "This here apple" or "That there apple." Any person 
who does that, either in the class or on the playground, any- 
where or at any time, should be reported and two deducted 
from his or her team score. 

28. When two objects are spoken of, the comparative de- 
gree is to ~be used, when more than two, the superlative. 

He was the wealthier man of the two (not "The wealth- 
iest"). She was the youngest of the three sisters (not "The 
younger of the three sisters"). 

Was Mr. Jones or Mr. Smith the wealthier? Is John or 
James the stronger boy ? Which is the strongest of you three 
boys? Who is the strongest in the class? 

Assignment 27. Observe that confusion in the use of these and 
those arises from the plural noun in a prepositional phrase that 
follows the singular noun. Write three sentences using each of 
the following phrases: (this — these) kind of children, (this — these) 
sort of soldiers, (this — these) few days. Also write sentences using 
the following correctly in the comparative and superlative degrees 
to illustrate the difference between references to two and to more 
than two: old, stingy, coarse-grained, rich, poor, hard-hearted, 
likable. 



CHAPTEK V 

Adverbs 

29. An adverb is a word which modifies a verb, adjective, 
or other adverb. Examples: Speak nicely, think clearly; 
very red, delicately soft ; very much pleased, fairly full. 

A phrase that modifies a verb is called an adverbial 
phrase. Examples: He came on time (corresponding to He 
came promptly) . He dances with much grace. 

A subordinate clause which modifies a verb is called an 
adverbial clause. 

Adverbs are regularly formed from adjectives by adding 
ly, but there are a few adverbs irregularly formed, such as 
often, very, much, well, too, just, note, soon. 

Adverbs which end in ly are compared by the use of more 
and most: quickly, more quickly, most quickly: You can get 
your lessons more quickly than I can (not "You can get your 
lessons quicker than I can"). Other adverbs add er or est: 
often, oftener, oftenest. The irregular adverb well uses as 
comparatives the adjective forms better and best: I learn my 
lessons better than you do. Do the best you can. 

Adverbs indicate hoiv, when, where, why a thing was done, 
or degree, manner, time, place, and reason or cause. 

The chief difficulty in the use of adverbs is that they are 
likely to get confused with adjectives. 

30. Any word which modifies a verb (or participle) , adjec- 
tive, or other adverb, must be an adverb and, not an adjec- 
tive. 

He does his work very well (not "Very good"). He came 
here previously to seeing you (not "Previous to seeing you") . 

84 



ADVERBS 85 

He acted conformably with the rules laid down (not "Con- 
formable with the rules laid down"). He was exceedingly 
kind to me (not "Exceeding kind to me"). He came agree- 
ably to his promise (not "Agreeable to his promise"). He 
could not have acted more nobly (not "Nobler than he did"). 
Step quickly (not "Step quick"). 

Assignment 28. Write two entirely fresh sentences correctly- 
using each of the adverbs very, well, previously, conformably, ex- 
ceedingly, -agreeably, nobly, faithfully, happily, splendidly. Then 
change those sentences so that an adjective would be required. 
Divide a sheet of paper by a line down the middle and place the 
adverbial sentences on the left and the sentences with adjectives on 
the right. 

31. // a word in the predicate really qualifies the meaning 
of the subject of the sentence, not the action of the verb, it is 
to be treated as a predicate adjective, not an adverb. 

Predicate adjectives, like predicate pronouns in the nom- 
inative, are used after the verbs to be, to appear, to seem, and 
also the verb to become. See Section 3. 

Compare — He is faithful with He acts faithfully, He seems 
gentle with He steps gently, He appears keen and alert with 
He steps alertly and criticizes sharply. 

Assignment 29. Write three sentences using each of the verbs 
given above which are followed by predicate adjectives (twelve sen- 
tences in all), placing them on the left-hand side of a sheet of 
paper, and then write twelve sentences in which you use the cor- 
responding adverbs with verbs that require adverbs, placing these 
just to the right of the first sentences. 

Also the verbs to look, to smell, to taste, to feel, to sound, 
and sometimes other verbs, are followed by predicate adjec- 
tives when the quality applies to the subject of the sentence 
and not to the manner of action in the verb. 

He feels bad about it (not "He feels badly," unless you 



86 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

mean that the feeling is done in a bad manner) . He looked 
white (not "He looked whitely"). He appeared faint (not 
"He appeared faintly"). The coat felt warm (not "Felt 
warmly"). The*cofFee smells good (not "Smells well"). 
The carriage rides easy (not "Eides easily"). The broom 
sweeps clean (not "Cleanly"). The tide runs strong (not 
"Strongly"). That piano sounds poor (not "Sounds 
poorly"). The milk tastes sour (not "Tastes sourly"). The 
general stood firm (not "Firmly"). The wind blows cold 
(not "Blows coldly"). The shutters are painted green (not 
"Are painted greenly"). 

The general stood so that he was firm,, The shutters are 
painted so that they are green, The carriage rides so that it 
seems to he easy. 

Assignment so. There are thirteen illustrative sentences above: 
write two sentences similar to each, using the same verb but finding 
a fresh predicate adjective and other words for each sentence. 

32. When adjectives are placed before verbals (participles) 
they should combine ivith them by means of a hyphen; other- 
wise an adverb must be used. 

He was a good-looking boy. He was a hard-headed man. 
He was a well dressed fellow (adverb, no hyphen). It was 
a bad-tasting apple. It is a cold-blowing wind. He opened 
the green-painted shutters. This is a warm-feeling coat. 

Observe that these adjective compounds correspond with 
the predicate adjectives above. 

Assignment 31. Take the twenty-six sentences written for As- 
signment 30 and combine the predicate adjectives with participles of 
the verbs so as to make hyphenated compounds (or show that this 
would not make good sense), and then beside each write the corre- 
sponding adverb with a participle (as two words). 

33. Negatives. The chief negative is the adverb not, 



ADVERBS 87 

which is often placed in the middle of a verb phrase, as 
"Does he not like me?" The corresponding adjective is 
no, as "No man can tell me that." The prefixes un and 
sometimes in (also non) indicate a negative or opposite 
meaning, as in unable and indecision. Sometimes a negative 
suggestion is conveyed by such a word as hardly: He is 
hardly able (meaning, He is not quite able). 

34. Two negatives make an affirmative in English, 

I don't do anything of the kind (not "I don't do nothing 
of the kind"). He need not, and does not lessen his opera- 
tions on my account (not "Nor does not"). I have received 
no information, either from him or his friends (not "Neither 
from him nor his friends" ). I hardly know T what to do (not 
"I don't hardly know"). I scarcely know how to thank you 
(not "I don't scarcely"). He was not unable to carry 
out his plan (that is, he was able). His language, though 
inelegant, is not ungrammatical (that is, it is grammatical). 

Assignment 32. There are seven illustrative sentences above. 
Write four sentences similar to each, retaining the key negative 
and the form of construction, but otherwise changing them as much 
as possible. 

35. Advert) and adjective modifiers should be placed close 
to the words they modify, else the meaning may be changed. 

Lost by a gentleman, a Scotch terrier with his ears cut 
close (not "Lost, a Scotch terrier, by a gentleman, w T ith 
his ears cut close"). He could see his way only by the help 
of a lantern (not "He could only see his way"). I men- 
tioned only one of the charges to him (not "I only men- 
tioned one of the charges to him"). I remember scarcely 
ever to have had a harder time of it (not "I scarcely ever 
remember"). 

Compare the dangling participle, Section 16. 



88 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Assignment 33. Rewrite the following correctly: A sign reads, 
"To be disposed of, a mail wagon, the property of a gentleman with 
removable headpiece as good as new." 

Patrolman Jenkins ordered him to drop his knife, but he 
failed to obey, and, in consequence, was shot in the west end or 
thereabouts. 

George Bascom, the well known Transcript man, had the mis- 
fortune yesterday to drop a heavy plank upon one of his toes, break- 
ing it in two places. 

Please order the furniture plant of the Joliet Prison to manu- 
facture for this institution six small tables such as women use 
who sew with folding legs. 

The engagement of Miss Margaret Ballantine, daughter of Mr. 
B. Ballantine. has been announced to Arthur Croxson. 

Will you give me your price on ground feed per ton? I farm 
a little and want this to feed myself. 



CHAPTER VI 

Conjunctions and Prepositions* 

36. A preposition introduces a noun or pronoun, a con- 
junction introduces a subordinate sentence. A noun or pro- 
noun introduced by a preposition is in the objective case, 
while a noun or pronoun following a conjunction is the sub- 
ject of an implied verb and must be in the subjective case. 

Like is a preposition and as and than are conjunctions. 
We say, "He is like me," "He acts like me" (not "Like I 
do"), but "He acts as I do," "I am older than he (is)" (not 
"older than him"). 

Note G. Any pupil caught in the classroom or on the 
playground or anywhere else saying "like I do" or "like he 
does" or anything similar, should be reported and two points 
should be deducted from the score of his or her team for each 
violation. 

37. Advanced. When two words connected, by a conjunc- 
tion are such as to require different prepositions after them, 
both prepositions must be given. 

He has made alterations in the work and additions to it 
(not "He has made alterations and additions to the work"). 
You may use stories and anecdotes, and ought to do so (not 
"You may and ought to use stories and anecdotes' 1 ). Com- 
pare their poverty with what they might possess, and ought 
to (not "What they might and ought to possess"). He 
entered without seeing her or being seen by her (not "With- 
out seeing or being seen by her"). 



*See Part I, Sees. 9, 11, and 14. 

89 



90 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Assignment 34. Advanced. Compose three original sentences 
similar to each of the illustrations above, in which there might be 
a temptation to omit the second preposition. 



38. Advanced. Do not connect different constructions by 
a coordinate conjunction. 

Neither have we forgot his past, nor do we despair of his 
present (not "Neither have we forgot his past, nor despair 
of his present"). Facts too well known and too obvious to 
be insisted on (not "Too well known and obvious to be in-, 
sisted on"). Every man of taste, who possesses an elevated 
mind, ought to feel grateful to the promoters of this exposi- 
tion (not "Every man of taste, and possessing an elevated 
mind"). They very seldom trouble themselves with inqui- 
ries, or with making useful observations (not "With 
inquiries or making useful observations"). 

Assignment 35. Advanced. Compose three sentences similar 
to each of the four illustrations above, in which there might natu- 
rally be a temptation to connect different constructions by and or or. 

39. Advanced. A conjunction should not be used with a 
relative pronoun or adverb, since such pronoun or adverb is 
itself conjunctive, unless there are two such pronouns or ad- 
verbs to be joined. 

The distinguishing excellence of Virgil, which in my opin- 
ion he possesses beyond all poets (not "And which in my 
opinion"). He left a son of a singular character, who be- 
haved so ill he was put in prison (not "And who behaved 
so ill"). It would be correct, however, to say, "Mr. Brown 
gave me back the rake which he borrowed from us and which 
he has kept in his barn ever since," since and properly con- 
nects the two which-clauses. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND PREPOSITIONS 91 

Assignment 36. Advanced. Compose five sentences in which 
a conjunction may properly be used between two relatives such as 
which, iv?w, that, what, where, when, while, and then change one 
of the clauses to some other construction so that need for the and 
or or is done away with and they must be omitted. 



CHAPTER VII 

Miscellaneous Expressions to Avoid 

40. Henry and John are alike (not "both alike/' as both 
and alike express the same idea). 

Divide it between you two, or among the three of you (be- 
tween two, among three or more). 

A hero, a horse, a healthy location ; an historical, an ha- 
bitual (a is best before accented syllables beginning with h, 
an before unaccented). 

Et cetera, abbreviated to etc., is Latin for and others, so 
and etc. is and and others. 

You live at a small town, and in a big one ; you arrive at 
a place that is almost a point, or in a city covering many 
square miles, or a state. 

Do not split an infinitive by placing an adverb between 
the sign to and the verb. Say, We made up our minds to go 
carefully over the ground (not "to carefully go over the 
ground"). 

Since a icidow is a woman, it is unnecessary to speak of 
a widow woman. 

Unless he gives me money (not "Without he gives me 
money," since without is a preposition and cannot be used 
as a conjunction). 

It is a vulgarism to say real hot, real cold, real nice for 
very hot, very cold, very nice. 

Never fall off of a wagon when you mean "fall off a 
wagon." 

A light-complexioned person, or a person with a light com- 



MISCELLANEOUS EXPRESSIONS TO AVOID 93 

plexitfn (not "a light-complected person" — complected is not 
a proper word ) . 

I am allowed to go to parties only on Saturday nights 
(not "I am not allowed to go only on Saturday nights" — 
the not is unnecessary). 

Don't worry, mother (not "Don't worry any" — any is un- 
necessary and wrong). 

Use the short form of and in any company name, as Mar- 
shall Brown & Co. (not "Marshall Brown and Company"), 
but do not use short and (&) in the body of a letter. 

Respectfully yours (not "Respectively yours"). 

I am somewhat better (not "some better"). 

Will you go somewhere with me tonight? (not "go some 
place"). 

Zero is called naught (not "aught"). 

We have a beginner in our school (not "a new beginner," 
since all beginners are new). 

Don't say "Isn't that nice?" "She is a nice girl." "The 
pie is nice." It is a good word in its place, but don't work 
it to death. 

John, come here! Oh, is that you, John? (Use in 
addressing a person by name, but oh as an exclamation by 
itself. ) 

1 have received your letter and thank you for it (not "for 
same," an objectionable commercial usage that good business 
men are now avoiding). 

This is not so good as that (not "not as good" — so should 
always be used after negatives). 

We stay at a hotel over night (not "stop at a hotel"). 

We smell the odor of the rose (not "smell of the rose"). 
We taste the apple sauce (not "taste of it"). 

Don't overwork splendid by applying it to things that have 
no real splendor — for example, 4t a splendid cup of tea," Do 



94 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

not overwork awful by applying it to things that do not make 
you to feel real awe — for example, "The custard was awful 
niceT 

"Sure!" is too Irish for common Americans to use all the 
time. 

Be careful not to write could of for could have, would of 
for would have, had of for had have. 

Let us trj^ to do it (not "try and do it"). 

There were fewer men and less ammunition (not "less 
men"). 

Avoid proven for proved, as it is antiquated. Say, He 
hasn't proved his claim (not "proven his claim"). 

I haven't gone as far as that (not u that far"). I haven't 
done so much as that (not "that much"). 

One thing is different from another (not "different than" 
or "different to"). 

I will not go unless Henry goes too (not "except Henry 
goes too," since except is a preposition and cannot be used 
as a conjunction). 

I suppose he did as you say (not "I expect he did," since 
there is no expectation in such a case). 

I ought not to do that, ought I? (not "I hadn't ought to 
do that, had If"). 

A person goes into the house, and then he is in a room 
(not "A person goes in the house," since into signifies motion, 
and in rest). 

You teach a boy, and the boy learns (not "You learn a 
boy his lesson," since learn is an intransitive verb, which 
never takes an object). 

We love our friends and like good things to eat. Don't 
say, I love apple pie. 

That boy stays away from school almost every day (not 
"most every day"). 



MISCELLANEOUS EXPRESSIONS TO AVOID 95 

I went to the party (not "I got to go to the party"). 

We are very much pleased to see you (not, "We are very 
pleased/' since very should never modify a verb direct). 

Let John and me go (not "Let John and myself go," since 
the intensive pronouns myself, yourself, himself, herself, our- 
selves, themselves should never be used as independent pro- 
nouns). 

(Look out for confusion of to, too, and two, and of there, 
their, and they, covered in Cody's "100% Speller.") 

Note R. Any pupil using one of these expressions incor- 
rectly should be reported, and two deducted from the score 
of the team to which he or she belongs. 



PRACTICE EXERCISES ON GRAMMATICAL 
CORRECTNESS 



(Patented Oct. 15, 1918 ; other patents pending) 



Mark the pad only. In the textbook merely check points where 
errors were found when pad was corrected, as an assignment for 
study. 



Test Exercise on Sections i and 2 

Draw a line through the wrong forms when two or more 
are given in parentheses : 

1. (She and her mother — Her and her mother) were at the 
ball. What was it (you and Clara and -me — you and Clara and I) 
saw Mrs. Fiske in last winter? 

2. This is a secret between (you and me — yeu-anTbT). It is 
a matter for (yetr-or~he — you or him). 

3. (Whtr— whom) will the paper be read by? (Whom— 
whe) will you see to-day? 

4. Does that apply to (us older boys — we— older boys). Is 
everybody going, including (him— and— her^he and she) ? 

5. Let (you and I — you and me) go to the postoffice. (Let's 
us — let us — let's) go to the camp to-day. Make (him and her — 
him and she — he-an~d-she~) do the work. 

6. When (Molly and me — Molly and I) saw him stretched 
out, we thought he was dead. We were up at his house, and 
(him — he) and Jenny and Sadie planned the whole thing. 

7. The flag was given by my mother (and me — antTI). We 
entered the theater with (he-an d Jolra — him and John). 

8. The hero stood directly between the grandstand and 
(w^— us). It can't make much difference to persons like (you 
ami-~I--you and me). (Whom — who) was the prize awarded 
to? (Whom — who) was awarded the prize? 

9. All the officers' positions were given to (us seniors — we 
seniors^. The peop] in our office all had to register, including 
(Joe- and I — Joe and me). 

10. Have (Jenny and her — Jenn^ and she) call on me to- 
night. Let your brother and you and (he/— him) distribute the 
mail. Make Mrs. Jones and (her — she) give up their tickets 
(Let 2 ^— Let us) salute. 

Total 



99 



Test Exercise on Section 3 
Cross out the wrong forms : 

That is supposed to be (he — Mffr)-. I should think it must 
be (her — she). Whom do you see down the road? That appears 
to be (him — he). Are those boys the champions? Those are 
(they — them). Who was it broke the glass? (We— ~*j#r) Did 
you spill this water on the floor? Yes, it was (I— 4#«). Who 
was it knocked at my door last night? That was (I — me-). Were 
the men who passed just now General Allenby and Ms staff? 
Yes, those were (they — them). Have they caught the burglar? 
The man they have seems to be (he — temp). Is that a picture 
of your friend Mrs. Rankin? That certainly appears to be (she 
— her). 

Total 

Test Exercise on Section 4 

Fill in mentally the missing verbs or prepositions before 
deciding which form to cross out : 

Tom Allen says no boy in his class got a mark in arithmetic 
as high as (he — -him). Those are dukes: are there any peers in 
England who rank higher than (they — thenr) ? Helen says her 
mother ought to punish John as severely as (she — her). I'd as 
soon go with Will as (him— -he)-. Would you say of President 
Wilson that no modern author is a more forceful writer than (he 
— him)? Mrs. Jones wants to know if you would rather accom- 
pany Mr. Franklin than (her — she) ? Which will you go with, 
(me — I) or (they — them)? Mr. Norton says the Rankins are 
much richer than (him — he). I should think Mr. Norton was at 
least as well off as (they — them). Do you condemn me as 
severely as (her — she) who really hatched the plot? 

Review 

(Who — whom) is the position to be held by? Will you ask 
your father to accompany Mary and you and (me — I)? Do you 
think the younger boys will be as successful as Henry and (me 
— I)? Who will go for a bucket of water? (I — me). To whom 
does this knife belong? (He — him). 

Total 
100 



1 2 
1 



Test Exercise on Sections 5 and 6 

Draw a line through the wrong form in parentheses: 

1. Each of those young men (has his — have their) own way 
of doing the work. 

2. All those young men (have their — has his) overcoat on. 

3. Every little plant and twig (was bursting its way — were 
bursting their way) into life. 

4. Everybody seemed to be doing as (they — he) liked. 

5. One will sacrifice a great deal to secure the freedom to 
live the life (they prefer — he prefers). 

6. Every sailor in the navy, every soldier in the army, and 
every officer in those special branches of government service (is — 
are) expected to assign a part of (his — their) pay to (his family — 
their families). 

7. Each mother, each son or daughter under sixteen will be 
entitled to a pension if dependent and (his — their) father or 
husband is killed in army or navy war service. 

8. Somebody left (his — their) rubbers in the hall last night. 

9. The prize was given to me, who (am — are) class leader 
for this semester. 

10. The old man's gardener, and his coachman, and his 
washerwoman called for (their — his) wages and gave notice 
(they — he) would leave. 

11. Was it the old man's gardener, or his coachman, or his 
washerwoman who called for (his — their) wages? 

12. Every flirtatious young girl in the crowd seemed to have 
(his — her — their) eye on a sailor. 

13. The ladies and gentlemen left (insert possessive 

pronoun) wraps in the anteroom. 

14. Every gentleman and lady left (his — their) wraps in the 
anteroom. 

15. Has any lady or gentleman present lost (his — their) din- 
ner ticket? 

16. Everybody brought (his — their) lunch. 

17. Nobody missed (his — their) train. 

18. Was it Mrs. Scott or Mr. Jarvis who trumped (his — 
their) partner's ace three times? 

19. I have a little book for him or her who shows a perfect 
score in (his — their) game of whist tonight. 

20. Has anybody in the room dropped (their — his) knife? 

Total 

101 



Test Exercise on Sections 7, 8, and 9 

In the following mark out the wrong form when two or 
more are given in parentheses : 

1. Every one of those sparrows (is — are) flying toward us. 

2. Each of the millions of human beings (has — have) a heart. 

3. Jack and I (are — am) on our way to the hall. 

4. Jack or I (are — am) on the list for a commission. 

5. Neither of the two (is — are) likely to get a commission. 

6. Either of those women (know — knows) the answer. 

7. A feature of this locomotive (is — are) the heavy wheels. 

8. Not all citizens of America (sing — sings) the national 
anthem. 

9. Not every citizen of America (sings — sing) the national 
anthem. 

10. Mrs. Jones or Mrs. Hatton or Miss Emmons (is — are) 
to entertain the club next time. 

11. Fellow club members, you and I (am — are) to make up 
this chorus. 

12. Fellow club members, (am — are — is) you or I to lead this 
chorus? 

13. Fellow club members, either you or I (are — am) going 
to pay this little bill. 

14. All this talk (don't — doesn't) affect me in the least. 

15. It (ain't — isn't) the money I care for. 

16. I'm going to have a piece of cake, (ainr— aren't — 
what?) I? 

17. (Don't — doesn't) he like your way of doing things? 

18. Those boys (ain't — aren't) studying their lessons. 

19. (Don't — doesn't) this class like arithmetic? 

20. (Isn't — ain't) our team going to play Saturday? No, 
(they ain't — it ain't — it isn't). 

21. I am going too, (aren't I — ain't I — am I not)? 

22. He said that every one of those ten million stars (are 
— is) a sun. 

23. Give the prize to each of those boys who (leads his class 
— lead their class) in some subject. 

24. (Are — is) the five infantry companies, or only the ma- 
chine gun unit, to go into battle? 

25. Harry Standish, along with Joe Bicknell and James 
Ford, (was — were) elected on the Republican ticket. 

Total 

102 



Test Exercise on Section 10 
Draw a line through the wrong form : 

1. The Company (has — have) issued its financial statement. 

2. Our factory (have — has) established new rules for em- 
ployes. 

3. The United States Army in France (have — has) fought 
well. 

4. An army of laboring men (was — were) pouring over the 
bridge. 

5. A few of the men (was — were) running. 

6. A number of the men (was — were) running. 

7. The number of men on the list (were — was) fifty. 

8. A fixed number of men (is — are) drawn each year. 

9. None to the men of our day (speaks — speak) so clearly 
as Wilson. 

10. None of the Fifth Regiment (were — was) wounded. 

11. The Jones Brothers Co. (have — has) joined the society. 

12. Jones Brothers (have — has) joined the society. 

13. Tait & Co. (have — has) joined the society. 

14. Lloyd George's cabinet (have — has) decided to resign. 

15. Mamie Brown, together with six other girls and five 
boys, (have — has) appeared for examination. 

16. Each of the sixteen companies of infantry and three 
companies of artillery (is — are) on parade. 

17. Several .f the sixteen companies of infantry and three 
companies of ■ rtillery (is — are) on parade. 

18. Every one of the forty-seven boys and the A division of 
girls (was — were) promoted. 

19. The President's staff, including Major-General Wood, 
Colonel Lansing, and Major Downing, (are — is) leading the pro- 
cession. 

20. The first essential in choosing your studies (is — are) 
definite aims. 

21. Captain Jones, as well as the sailors, (has — have) been 
wounded. 

22. None of the fifty men (are — is) eligible. 

23. Our class of ninety-five (has — have) just graduated. 

24. The congregation of the Episcopal church (are — is) vot- 
ing for a pastor. 

25. The United States (is — are) demanding reciprocity. 

Total 
103 



First Test Exercise on Section n 

Cross out the wrong form in parentheses : 

1. I (awoke — awaked) at five o'clock this morning. 

2. When I had fully (awaked — awoke) I was frightened. 

3. The boys (done — did) their work excellently. 

4. Has the horse (drunk — drank) yet? 

5. It was so hot I (drunk — drank) a large glass of water. 

6. I (gave — give) him three cents for a paper last night. 

7. Just as he (laid — lay) down to sleep, the alarm went off. 

8. Had the rug (lain — laid) there long? 

9. The boy (lay — laid) the book on his desk. 

10. Just as the boy had (laid — lain) the book on his desk, 
he fainted. 

11. Has the bell (rung — rang)? 

12. He (rung — rang) the bell. 

13. Was that a mouse that (ran — run) along the floor? 

14. The poor woman (shrunk — shrank) back at the insult. 

15. The choir has just (sung — sang) an anthem. 

16. When was it the choir (sung — sang) this anthem? 

17. The old man (sunk — sank) to the ground. 

18. A squirrel (sprung — sprang) from a tree to the roof. 

19. Had the lad (sprung — sprang) up when you came in? 

20. When was it that Leander (swum — swam) the Helles- 
pont? 

21. The sailor had (swum — swam) for an hour in the cold 
water. 

22. You seem to have (woven — wove) this basket neatly. 

Total 

Cross out the wrong form and write in the correct one : 

23. She had (wrote ) me a letter. 

24. I have (went ) three times to school this term. 

25. I saw the bird had (flew ) over my head. 



Total 



1 2 



104 



Second Test Exercise on Section 1 1 

If the word in each parenthesis in the following sentences 
is wrong, write the correct word in the blank space and cross 
out the wrong word; but if it is correct, draw a straight line 
through the blank space: 

1. He had (rose — ) to a high position in politics. 

2. I tell you that I (seen — ) him do the deed. 

3. Have you (spoke — ) to him yet? 

4. The alarm-clock (awoke — ) me. 

5. Did you say you (done — ) the job? 

6. The cat had (eat — ) all the meat. 

7. Did you hear him say he had (went — ) to town? 

8. The bellman had (rang — ■ ) the bell. 

9. The great ship (sank — ) rapidly. 

10. The great ship had (sank — ) rapidly. 

11. The boy declared the girl had (threw — ) the ball. 

12. The boy has just (come — ) in. 

13. My father (wrote — ) that letter. 

14. I told him my father had (wrote — ) that letter. 

15. Had the French at that time (drove— ) the Ger 
mans back? 

16. The Indians had (wove — ) a beautiful rug. 

17. Do you admit you have (drank — ) all the water 9 

18. Did you say, "I (drunk — ) all the water?" 

19. Did you say the hay was all (blew — ) away? 

20. Had the dog (ate— ) the bird? 

21. The naturalist thought the bird had (flew — ) a hun- 
dred miles. 

22. I (done — ) exactly as you told me to. 

23. The boy was crying because he had (tore — ) his 
pants. 

24. I know quite well that you have (ridden — ) part 
way home. 

25. Pershing had only a few weeks before (came — ) 
into France. 

Total 
105 



First Test Exercise on Section 12 



1. I refuse to (except — accept) your offer. 

2. The teacher (excepted — accepted) her from the require- 
ment because she was ill. 

3. Hadn't you better go and (lie — lay) down for a rest? 

4. The nurses (lay — laid) the wounded on the floor. 

5. The forms of men and women exhumed at Pompeii had 
(laid — lain) there for centuries. 

6. Were you (laying — lying) down when I came in? 

7. The man (lay — laid) all the blame on me. 

8. (Sit — set) the lamp on the table. 

9. The young people had been (setting — sitting) on the sofa 
for an hour. 

10. The hen is (setting — sitting) on the eggs. 

11. I had just come in and (sat — set) down. 

12. I had just come in and (sat — set) the lamp on the table. 

13. (Let — leave) me go. 

14. The men (rose — raised) the roof up an inch. 

15. The child (rose — raised) right up in bed. 

16. I am asking for a (raise — rise) of salary. 

17. Can he (rise — raise) from the floor? 

18. Can he (rise — raise) himself from the floor? 

19. In the spring freshet the creek had (overflown — over- 
flowed) its banks. 

20. The thief had (flown — fled) down a dark alley. 

21. The soldiers were (flying — fleeing) down the road before 
the hostile army. 

22. (May — can) I have the pleasure of your company to- 
night? 

23. You (can — may) go to get a drink. 

24. The (loose — lose) chain caused her to (lose— loose) her 
glasses. 

Total 



106 



Second Test Exercise on Section 12 

Draw a line through the wrong form w T hen two or more 
are given in parentheses: 

1. Do you say, "I (will — shall) do it whether you forbid it 
or not"? 

2. I (shall — will) do it if I live till next year. 

3. I (shall — will) be glad to see you. 

4. We (shall — will) be pleased to grant your request. 

5. You (shall — will) not get the position if I can prevent it 

6. It seems to me very unlikely that he (shall — will) get the 
job. 

7. He says he (shall — will) be there on time. 

8. It seems quite clear to me that the French (shall — will) 
soon rebuild their country. 

9. The French say that they (shall — will) soon rebuild their 
country. 

10. The French say they (will — shall) accept the offer if 
urged to do so. 

11. Do you say you (shall — will) do it in spite of everything? 

12. Do you say you (shall — will) do it if the opportunity 
offers? 

13. The men say they (will — shall) accept the settlement. 

14. I am quite sure I (should — would) enjoy that play. 

15. I am quite sure you (should — would) enjoy that play. 

16. I am quite sure my sister (would — should) enjoy that 
play. 

17. She thought she (would — should) enjoy that play. 

18. She told him he (should — would) do as he was told. 

19. The strikers say they (will — shall) not return even if 
wages are raised 10 per cent. 

20. (Should — would) you like to go with me? 

21. He said he (should — would) like to go with me. 

22. The Americans (will — shall) hold the line even if as- 
saulted by double their number. 

23. I (will — shall) be much pleased to fill your order imme- 
diately. 

24. They said they (would — should) be much pleased to 
accept. 

25. I know you (would— should) be glad to accept. 

Total 
107 



Test Exercise on Section 13 

Draw a line through the wrong form when two or more are 
given in parentheses : 

1. Napoleon (surrendered — has surrendered) in 1814. 

2. The armistice (was signed — has been signed) early this 
morning. 

3. I (heard — have heard) the bells ringing all the morning. 

4. I (just heard — have just heard) the announcement of the 
victory. 

5. The amount received so far (has not equaled — did not 
equal) the interest on the loan. 

6. Before you entered the President (has made — made) his 
speech. 

7. We do not know what (has happened — happened) yester- 
day. 

8. We do not know what (has happened — happened) since 
yesterday. 

9. (Was he already looking — did he already look) better? 

10. (Haven't you heard — didn't you hear) from your sis- 
ter yet? 

11. I (have mentioned — -mentioned) it to him after I talked 
with you. 

12. I (have not mentioned — did not mention) it to him so far. 

13. I (have mentioned — mentioned) it to him yesterday. 

14. Was it last week you (have finished — finished) the work? 

15. When I saw you I (hadn't heard — didn't hear) from 
him. 

16. And I (haven't heard — didn't hear) from him yet. 

17. The lady says she (has been told — was told) after we 
talked with her. 

18. The lady says she (has been told — was told) since we 
talked with her. 

Total 



108 



Test Exercise on Section 40 
Correct the following sentences on this sheet, or if two 
forms are given in parentheses, cross out the wrong one : 

1. My sister is very dark-complected. 

2. I strongly advise you to thoughtfully consider the matter. 

3. I shouldn't care to go without she invites me. 

4. Do you live at Chicago or in Canterbury Center? 

5. At the restaurant we ordered soup, roast, pie, and the et 
ceteras. 

6. She gave (a — an) hearty laugh. We lived at (a — an) 
hotel. He was (a — an) habitual drunkard. 

7. Divide the apples between the entire class. 

8. Your brothers are not both alike in the iron business. 

9. She never called on me only when she was sent. 

10. The letter was signed "Yours respectively." 

11. You needn't hurry any, Fanny. 

12. Are you going with me some place tonight? 

13. Jennie was a new beginner among our stenographers. 

14. (Oh— O) Mary, why did you do it? (Oh— 0), why did 
you do it? 

15. Your order received, and same is having our attention. 

16. Just smell of that sour milk! 

17. I could of had the job if I'd of wanted it. 

18. Are there less stenographers in your office than in ours? 

19. Oh, that is very different than anything I have seen. 

20. I shouldn't be willing to go that far. 

21. You can't have this job except you are willing to work 
hard. 

22. I ought not to do that, had I? 

23. I will learn my dog that trick. 

24. Did you get to see him when you were in town? 

25. We are very pleased to grant your request. 

26. Why don't your brother and yourself buy the house? 

27. They are too persons who like to go too town too often. 

28. Their are twenty of them in all. 



Total 



109 



REVIEW CHECK-UP TEST ON GRAMMAR 
Since the principles covered in the first thirteen sections 
of the text represent more than half of all errors commonly 
made, a short course should concentrate on the fullest mas- 
tery of these sections and the Miscellaneous Expressions to 
Avoid in Section 40. After these sections have been covered 
by the exercises in the text and the special test exercises 
(available in pad form), the following review will show the 
principles which need further study. If every sentence 
under any section is correctly marked in the test, that would 
indicate that the principle of that section is understood, 
but if there is a single error in the group of test sentences 
under any section except Section 11, it should be assumed 
that the principle of that section is not thoroughly under- 
stood and it should be carefully reviewed, especially through 
writing more sentences illustrating the principle, according 
to the assignment found in the text. Section 11 is simply a 
check-up of individual verbs, and only the verbs on which 
errors are made need study. 

The remaining sections should then be covered rapidly 
with the assignments in the text and the general test begin- 
ning with the 100th sentence. 

Cross out the wrong form in parentheses, or write the 
single correct word opposite the sentence number: 

Section i. 

1. (We — us) boys had a stag party. 

2. Do you remember when Joe and Mabel and (me — I) fell 
into the lake? 

Section 2. 

3. We will leave it to Masie and Molly and (her — she). 

4. You have beaten Henry and (I — me). 

5. Let John and (he — him) run the car. 

6. (Who — whom) will you invite? 

7. (Who — whom) will you give the book to? 

Total 
110 



Cross out the wrong form in parentheses, or write the 



single correct word opposite the sentence number : 

Section 3. 

8. (Who — whom) does that appear to be? 

9. (Who — whom) was that? That was either Helen or (I — 
me). 

10. (Who — whom) do you think that is? That picture is 
supposed to be Joe and (her — she). 

11. Do you think those were the Joneses? Those must have 
been (them — they). 

Section 4. 

12. You are ever so much smarter than (me — I). 

13. Can you run as fast as (he — him) ? 

14. Which do you like best, Helen or (me — I) ? 

15. Helen was so meek, her mother scolded John worse than 
(her — she). 

Section 5. 

16. Each of the girls will wear (her sunbonnet — their sun- 
bonnets). 

17. Everybody must be on hand with (his rake — their rakes). 

18. All members of the class must be on hand with (his 
rake — their rakes). 

19. Somebody will be sorry (he — they) didn't tell the truth. 

20. The class will average up to (their — its) last year's 
record. 

21. Every boy and girl in the high school will be obliged to 
study some of (their — his) lessons at home. 

Section 6. 

22. What will you give to John and Mary for doing (their- 
his) lessons correctly? 

23. Will you give an apple to John or Mary for finishing (his 
— her) lessons first? 

24. Either Miss Samuels or Mr. Hartley will have to give 
up (his — their) position. 

Note A. Advanced. 

25. Will you give the prize to (whoever — whomever) makes 
the best time? 

26. I shall appoint (whomever — whoever) under the circum- 
stances we agree is the most competent. 

Total 
111 



Cross out the wrong form in parentheses, or v^rite the 
single correct word opposite the sentence number : 

Sections 7, 8. 

27. Every pupil in this room (is — are) expected to be on 
hand at eight o'clock sharp. 

28. Each of those million little twinkling stars (is — are) bil 
lions of miles away. 

29. (Do — does) Henry and you take part in the program? 

30. (Do — does) Henry or you take part in the program? 

31. You or John or I (is — am — are) obliged to take the re- 
sponsibility. 

Section 9. 

32. Now, Henry, that (doesn't — don't) look right. 

33. I am going to town, with the team, (ain't — aren't — what?) 
I? 

34. Mary (don't — doesn't) need to go today. 

35. (Isn't — aren't — ain't) the class agreed? 
Section 10. Advanced. 

36. The J. I. Case Company (have — has) subscribed 25. 

37. The Company (has — have) raised my pay. 

38. Henry Durand & Co. (have — has) subscribed $25. 

39. None of these boys (have — has) made 100%. 

40. A number of these boys (have — has) made 100%. 

41. What is the exact number of pencils that (go — goes) in 
this box? 

Note C. Advanced. 

42. Sixteen hundred dollars (is — are) more than I can afford. 

43. Politics (doesn't — don't) appeal to many men. 

44. Athletics (flourish — flourishes) in our college. 

45. By (this — these) means we pulled him out of the well. 

46. Tidings of the victory (have — has) just arrived from 
Europe. 

Section 11. 

47. Early this morning I had just (awaked — awoke). 

48. Just then I (come — came) in. Has he (come — came) 
back yet? 

49. -Have you (bore — borne) such a heavy load before? 

50. Has the wind (blown — blew) down all the oats? 

51. How many delegates has the convention (chose — chosen) ? 

52. Henry and I (done — did) the work. Has that little runt 
(did — done) the same thing again? 

Total 
112 



Cross out the wrong form in parentheses, or write the 
'single correct word opposite the sentence number: 

53. Did you say Harrison had (drew — drawn) the knife out? 

54. The horse has (drunk — drank) a bucket of water. The 
horse (drunk — drank) a bucket of water. 

55. Were the sheep all (drove — driven) into the yard? 

56. Has the cat (eat — eaten — ate) that bowl of mush? Yes 
terday morning she (eat — ate) more than that. 

57. How far has he (fell— fallen) ? 

58. How far had the bird (flew — flown)? 

59. Last night John (give — gave) me all his marbles. Has 
he really (given — gave) you all he had? 

60. He had hardly (gone — went) a block before a policeman 
stopped him, 

61. When all those chickens have (grown — grew) up, you 
will have a fine flock. 

62. What would you have done if you had (knew — known) 
63! The horseman had already (rode — ridden) fifty miles. 

64. Just before nine the bell was (rung — rang). 

65. After school last night I (run — ran) in to see you. I have 
just (run — ran) in to see you. 

66. The boy (saw — seen) the whole thing. Have you (saw 
— seen) him yet? 

67. I tell you, he was badly (shook — shaken) up. 

68. Have those blankets (shrunk — shrank) six inches? 

69. After they had (sang — sung) a song they went out. 

70. The principal has just (spoke — spoken) to me about it. 

71. The cat had just (sprang — sprung) at the bird. 

72. I saw the dog before it had (stole — stolen) the meat. 

73. Did you say you had (swum — swam) across the lake? 

74. The janitor has (taken — took) my books. 

75. When she had (tore — torn) off a piece of cloth, she tied 
up my finger. 

76. That paper was (thrown — threw) out the window. 

77. Has the Indian (wove — woven) this basket? 

78. Before you had (wrote — written) me I had found out 
about it. 

Note D. 

79. She says to me, All right. Then (say— says) I to her, 
Come along. 

Total 
113 



Cross out the wrong form in parentheses, or write the 
single correct word opposite the sentence number : 

Section 12. 

80. Before ten I (laid — lay) down on the sofa, having (laid 
— lain) my book on the table. 

81. I saw the knife (lying — laying) there. There is where 
the knife was (laid — lain). My mother had just (lain — laid) 
down. 

82. The hen was (setting — sitting) on the nest. (Sit — set) 
the lamp on the table. 

83. I had just (set — sat) down when Julia came in and (sat 
— set) this flowerpot on the stand. 

84. Did you say you would (let — leave) him go with me? 

85. The poor bird then (raised — rose) its head. A moment 
later it (raised — rose) right up. 

86. The hawk had (flew — flown) all around the place. For 
twenty years the little brook had (flown — flowed) by the house. 

87. It was reported that the robber had (flown — fled). It 
was reported that the river had (overflowed — overflown) its 
banks. 

88. (Can — may) I write this with ink? You and Helen 
(may — can) get a drink. 

89. Did you (lose — loose) your book? Your dress seems to be 
very (lose — loose). 

90. (Shall — will) we have an examination tomorrow? Yes, 
you (will — shall) have one. 

91. I (should — would) be pleased to see you in the morning. 

92. (Should — would) you like to have a motor? Yes, I 
(should — would). 

93. (Shall — will) he be compelled to obey you? I am deter- 
mined that he (shall — will). 

94. He says he (should — would) like to go too. 
Section 13. 

95. Oh, yes, she (has called — called) me up last night. 

96. Already I (have met — met) Mr. Jones. 

97. My friends (gave — have given) me many courtesies since 
I came to this town. 

98. You (made — have made) a score of 98 so far. 

99. My daughter (has met — met) the lady before this. My 
daughter (met — has met) the lady before you introduced her. 

Total 

114 



Cross out the wrong form in parentheses, or write the 
single correct word opposite the sentence number : 

Section 14. Advanced. 

100. Helen was very anxious (to graduate — to have gradu- 
ated*) in June. 

101. I have seen my father every time I (came — have come). 

102. He says he should very much have liked (to accom- 
pany — to have accompanied) us. 

103. Did you say Washington (was — is) situated on the 
Potomac? 

Section 15. Advanced. 

104. We all wish he (were — was) going with us. 

105. I should be surprised if Joe (was — were) at the head 
of his class. What would you do if you (was — were) he? 

106. His teacher was uncertain whether Joe (was — were) 
at the head of his class. 

Section 16. Advanced. 

107. While standing on the sidewalk, a piece of stone flew 
up and hit me.— While standing on the sidewalk I was hit by a 
piece of stone that flew up. 

108. By studying as hard as you can, there is no danger you 
I will fail to pass. — By studying as hard as you can, you are sure 
, to avoid the danger of failing to pass. 

109. Referring to your letter just received, what settlement 
do you suggest? — With reference to your letter just received, may 

i I ask what settlement you suggest? 
Section 17. Advanced. 

110. I saw (him — his) coming in at the gate. 

111. Have you heard the news of (John's — John) joining 
the army? 

Section 18. Advanced. 

112. Has there been a report on next Monday being a holiday? 
— Has there been any report as to whether next Monday will be 
a holiday? 

Section 19. 

113. Write the plural of — church, piano, tomato, turkey, thief 
handkerchief, himself, foot, ox, son-in-law, cupful, sheep. 

114. Advanced. Write the plural of — phenomenon, alumnus, 
alumna, datum, stratum, beau, formula, memorandum, analysis., 
crisis, basis, oasis, manservant, Knight Templar, physics, news 
athletics, a, 2, c, people, die, penny. Total 

* Correct, though some purists would insist on to be graduated, to have been graduated. 

115 



u: 



Cross out the wrong form in parentheses, or write the 
single correct word opposite the sentence number : 

Section 20. 

115. Write the possessive singular (and plural if there is a 
plural form) of each of the following: Henry Church, Janes, fairy, 
child, lady. 

Section 21. 

116. Mrs. Smith and Mrs. Jones have one house, and we speak 
of it as (Mrs. Smith's and Mrs. Jones's — Mrs. Smith and Mrs. 
Jones's) house. 

117. John has books and Mary has books, and we speak of 
them as (John and Mary's — John's and Mary's) books. 

Section 22. 

118. Write the possessive form of — superintendent of schools, 
Lincoln the Emancipator, corporal of the guard. 

Section 23. 

119. What is that book's thickness? — What is the thickness 
of that book? 

120. Have you seen today's score? — The score of today? 

121. For (goodness' — goodness's) sake! 
Note E. 

122. I sign myself (your's truly — yours truly). The child 
has lost (it's — its) top. That girl has lost (her's — hers) also. 

Section 24. Advanced. 

123. Do you approve of (doing problems on the board — doing 
of problems on the board) ? 

124. (The building of ships — The building ships) for our 
merchant marine was intrusted to General Goethals. 

Sections 25, 26. 

125. That was the (happiest — most happy) day I ever knew. 
That was the (delightfulest — most delightful) day I ever knew. 

126. That cake tastes (worse — worser) than the first one. 
Section 27. 

127. Lay down (them — those) books. 

128. I can't bear to talk with (that — those) kind of people. 

129. (Those — that) sort of boys and girls can never be de- 
pended on. 

Section 28. 

130. Is John or James the (stronger — strongest)? 

131. Which is the (worse — 'worst), being kept in at recess, 
staying after school, or coming on Saturday? 

Total 

116 






Cross out the wrong form in parentheses, or write the 
single correct word opposite the sentence number: 

Sections 29, 30. 

132. Move (more quickly — quicker). 

133. The plan should work out very (good — well). 

134. He was an (exceeding — exceedingly) fast runner. 

135. (Agreeable — agreeably) to her promise, the teacher took 
us to the theater. 

Section 31. 

136. Mrs. Jarvis feels very (unhappily — unhappy) about it. 

137. That record sounds (fine — finely). 

138. The north winds seem to blow very (cold — coldly) today. 

Section 32. 

139. That is a very (well-bound — well bound) book. He was 
a (hard-headed — hard headed) man. 

Sections 33, 34. 

140. He says he (doesn't know hardly — hardly knows) what 
to say. 

141. Henry need not (nor ought not — and ought not) to stay 
at home any longer. 

Section 35. 

142. You will (only find — find only) one mistake. 

143. He says he (scarcely remembers — remembers scarcely) 
ever to have had so hard a lesson. 

Section 36. 

144. Are you going to get a job (like me — like I have — such 
as I have?) 

Section 37. Advanced. 

145. You can make additions and corrections in your theme 
until you hand it in. — You can make additions to your theme 
and corrections in it till you hand it in. 

146. You know what you might and ought to accomplish. 
You know what you might accomplish and ought to. 

Section 38. Advanced. 

147. Any child with a flag and possessing a drum. — Any child 
who has a flag and possesses a drum. 

148. She is a young woman of excellent bearing and wearing 
her clothes with a distinguished air. — She is a young woman of 
excellent bearing, who wears her clothes with a distinguished air 

Total 
117 



PART III 
LETTER WRITING 



CHAPTER I 

Using Words so as to Make People Do 

Things 

Business letter writing is not a study of forms and usages. 
It is rather a study of human nature and "how to use words 
so as to make people do things." 

If the student catches the idea that letters are talks on 
paper which must actually do business, and must be just as 
simple, direct, and clear as a business talk, instinct will help 
greatly to make the mastery of forms and usages easy. 

Every young man or woman who goes into business must 
do business, for himself or for his employer, and much of 
this business (to save time and travel) must be done on 
paper. The study of business letter writing should there- 
fore be the study of business in a nutshell. 

But skill comes only by beginning with the simple things 
— and most of the letters in this book will be found to be 
merely simple, easy, and natural. The letter writer who 
can be "simple, easy, and natural" on paper is already well 
on the high road to success. 

Familiar Notes* 

1 3/4/04. 

Mr. Jones : 

Will you notify the clerks in your department that on and 
after Monday next, July 11, this store will close at 5.30 p. m. 
instead of at 5.45, as in the past, and only three quarters of 
an hour will be allowed at noon — from 12 to 12.45, or from 
12.45 to 1.30? A. W. Thorne, Mgr. (58 words) 

* An exercise on each chapter will be found at the end of the book, beginning on 
page 223. 

121 



122 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

This short method of writing a date is very appropriate in a note 
like this, but should never be used in a regular letter. 

Nowadays writing "p. m." or "a. m." in small letters is preferred, 
though capitals are not incorrect. The abbreviation should always 
be used after the first of a series of figures indicating hours, but 
may be omitted after other figures in the same connection. 

A period is most convenient between figures indicating hours and 
minutes, though a colon is not incorrect, and was once regularly 
used. 

2 

6/31/98. 
Miss Kennedy : 

I shall not return to the office until tomorrow. I expect 
to be iu from 9 o'clock to 1. Please complete the letters I 
gave you and have them ready for me to look over the first 
thing in the morning. 

A. W. Thorne. (48 words) 

Notice that "Miss" is not an abreviation, and is not followed by 

a period. "O'clock" is not written with a capital letter in the middle 

of a sentence. 
Numbers below ten and round numbers such as one hundred, 

one thousand, etc., are not usually to be written in figures unless 

in a series. In this note 9 and 1 constitute the smallest possible 

series. 

3 

7/31/99. 
Mr. Thorne: 

Mr. Kelly called this morning at ten o'clock and said he 
wished very much to see you this afternoon. He will call at 
four if possible. 

Agnes Kennedy. (36 words) 

In business letters we usually write hours and minutes in figures, 
though in social letters the written words are more common. When 
a full hour like "ten" is mentioned it may be written with "o'clock" 



USING WORDS TO MAKE PEOPLE DO THINGS 123 

in full; but if two or more hours are mentioned in succession, the 
figures may be preferred. Do not mix the styles in the same sen- 
tence or letter. 

4 

10/3/04. 
Miss Kennedy: 

I wish you would be a little more prompt in the morning. 
I noticed that this morning you were not at the office until 
almost 9 o'clock. You know the hour we spoke of when you 
took this position was 8.30. 

A. W. Thorne. (48 words) 

5 

Mr. A. W. Thorne: 

I wish to go out a little earlier to-day, to do some shop- 
ping. May I get off at twelve and stay until half past one? 

Eespectfully, (31 words) 

Agnes Kennedy. 






CHAPTER II 

How to Begin a Business Letter 

1. A letter should always be dated, and if the address is 
not printed, it should be written by preference at the upper 
right-hand corner of the paper. It is not considered good 
style to place the address immediately after the signature 
except in giving an order for shipment. 

2. The address and date line should not begin near the 
left-hand margin. It should begin at least one-third of the 
way across the page, and two or three lines may be used for 
it if necessary. ~ 

3. Care should be used to punctuate the date and ad- 
dress line correctly. Separate each item from the next by a 
comma, and place a period at the end; but do not put any 
comma between the month and day of the month ("Feb, 15/' 
"16th Jan.," and the like), or between the name of the street 
and the word "street" or the like, or between the number and 
the name of the street ("135 Jackson Boulevard," "623 Opera 
House Building," "6-J Jasmine Street"). 

Many modern writers omit punctuation at ends of lines, 
but items in the same line should not be run together so as 
to cause confusion. Use a sense of artistic proportion in the 
arrangement of the lines.* 

4. When the name of a street is a number and the house 
number immediately precedes it, the number of the street 
should be written out, as "76 First St.," though "119 W. 17th 
St." is all right because the "W." stands between the two 
numbers and prevents confusion. Some separate the num- 

* Study the arrangement of the facsimile letters on pages 223-253. 

124 



HOW TO BEGIN A BUSINESS LETTER 125 

bers by a dash, but this is not the best usage. To separate 
them by a comma is wrong in this country, though in Eng- 
land the number is always set off by a comma from the 
name of the street. 

5. It is not necessary to put "th" or "nd" or "st" 
after the day of the month, except in the body of a letter 
when numbers indicating days of months stand alone, as 
"the 6th inst." 

6. In business letters it is usual always to place the ad- 
dress of the person written to at the head of the letter, be- 
ginning the name flush with the left-hand edge of the writing 
(which should be uniformly an inch from the edge of the 
paper, so as to leave a blank margin). The address should 
follow the name, in one line if possible, and may be indented 
half an inch or more or squared up flush in case of type- 
written letters only, the arrangement being more a matter 
of taste than anything else. 

7. Courtesy suggests placing a title before or after a name, 
as "Mr. John Jones" or "John Jones, Esq.," "Messrs. Henry 
Harland & Co.," "Mrs. John D. Farrier," etc. Two titles of 
the same kind are to be avoided (as Mr. John Jones, Esq.), 
but when one is a courtesy title and the other a part of the 
address (as Mr. John Jones, President), both are allowable. 
Avoid Dr. Henry Smith, M. D., but Eev. Samuel Harvey, 
D. D., is all right. When a corporation name begins with 
"the" no title need be used, but the "the" should always be 
inserted, as "The Macmillan Co.," "The Illinois Trust & Sav- 
ings Bank," etc. In England "Messrs." is used before these 
names also, and "the" omitted. American usage tends to 
omission of titles in business letters but not in social letters. 
"Esq." is used after names of lawyers. 

8. A comma should be placed after the name, and if some 
corporation title is added, such as "President," this also 



126 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

should be followed by a comma. Many omit marks at ends 
of these lines. 

9. Each item of the address of the person written to 
should be set off by a comma, but the same rules apply that 
were given in speaking of the address of the person writing. 
See No. 3. 

10. It is most common to close the address with a period. 
This is the natural and easy way if the address ends with an 
abbreviation followed by a period. In other cases usage 
varies somewhat, but a period or no mark is usual, as 

Mr. John Jones, President, 

The Continental Trust Co., Chicago. 

11. The salutation should be placed flush with the left- 
hand margin or edge of the writing. It is a common error 
to indent this, as if it marked the beginning of a paragraph. 
Many ladies begin their letters — 

Mr. Cody, 

Dear Sir, — 

Should be 
Mr. Sherwin Cody, 

Lake Bluff, 111. 
Dear Sir: 

The former indicates lack of knowledge of business usage. 
The address should always be given, and the salutation 
brought back to the margin. 

12. The proper salutation for a purely business letter to a 
stranger is "Dear Sir" if but one person is addressed, "Gen- 
tlemen" after a firm name. "Dear Sirs" after a firm name or 
corporation name is now antiquated, though formerly it had 
plenty of authority. When several individuals are ad- 
dressed, "Dear Sirs" seems the more appropriate form. In 
addressing a woman who writes to a business house, the only 
form to use is "Dear Madam." "Dear Miss" and "Dear 



HOW TO BEGIN A BUSINESS LETTER 127 

Mile." are not supported by good authority. While "Dear 
Madam" is not appropriate in writing to a very young girl, it 
is not supposed that a child will enter into correspondence; 
or if she does the stranger who answers her letter should not 
take it upon himself to decide whether she is an infant or 
not, but treat her as if she were a grown woman. When 
the person written to is known to the writer as a young 
woman, as all girls entering a school would be, it is best to 
follow "Dear" by the name of the lady, as "Dear Miss 
Blank." In writing to a young girl, we use her first name 
after "Miss," as "Dear Miss Ethel." It is more common to 
abate formality and write "Dear Mrs. Blank" when address- 
ing a married woman than it is in addressing a man. We 
seldom see "Dear Mr. Blank" unless the writer wishes to 
indicate unusual friendliness.* 

13. While according to strict rules it is not proper to 
place the name and address at the head of the letter when 
the salutation contains the name, still the custom is almost 
universal in business correspondence. Properly the name 
and address should go to the end of the letter in such a case, 
being placed flush with the left-hand margin as when it is 
placed at the beginning. 

14. "Dear Friend" at the beginning of a business letter is 
looked on as vulgar, and is not used by high-grade houses. 

15. The salutation should be followed by a colon. In this 
country a simple colon is looked on as the best usage for 
business letters, a comma for social letters. The dash after 
the colon is going rapidly out of style. 

16. Formerly it was the custom to begin the body of a 
letter by dropping down a line and going on from the end 
of the salutation, but now the best usage begins the body of 

*In addressing a firm of ladies use "Mesdames" in place of "Messrs.," and "Ladies" 
in place of "Gentlemen." 



128 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

the letter as a paragraph, with the regular paragraph in- 
dention. 

17. Modern typewritten letters tend to have a wide margin 
of white all around, but pen-written letters retain the old- 
fashioned narrow margin of half to three quarters of an 
inch on the left-hand side and a quarter of an inch to half an 
inch on the right, and the address after the name should 
never be squared up in case of pen-written letters. The 
block style belongs to typewritten letters only. 

Simple Letters 
6 
Columbus, Ohio, April 12, 1919. 
Mr. Abner McKinley, 

310 Tenth St., Columbus, Ohio. 
Dear Sir: 

Mr. J. Scott Clark, who is staying at the Brattleford 
Hotel, would like to call on you at your convenience, and has 
asked me to write to you requesting an appointment. 

Thanking you for prompt attention to this matter, I am 
Very truly yours, (62 words) 

John Raymond, Sec. 

Many newspapers nowadays write the abbreviation "st." for 
"street" with a small letter, and perhaps this usage will prevail. 
If this is done, "ave." and "boul." should also be written with 
small letters. The best business correspondence retains the capital. 

7 

(address and date) 
Mr. J. Scott Clark, 

Brattleford Hotel, Columbus, Ohio. 
Dear Sir : 

In response to a note from your secretary requesting an 



HOW TO BEGIN A BUSINESS LETTER 129 

* 

appointment, let me say that I will see you at my office to- 
morrow morning at ten o'clock. I shall be glad to see you 
then, and hope the hour will be convenient for you. 

Yours truly, (58 words) 

Abner McKinley. 

Never say "I will be glad to see you/' for there is no "will" 
or determination "to be glad." It is just as bad to say "we will 
be pleased," as if you were determined to be pleased on any ac- 
count. "Shall" regularly follows "we" and "I," "will" follows 
"you," "he," "they," etc. 

8 

(address and date) 

Mr. Abner McKinley, 

310 Tenth St., Columbus, Ohio. 

Dear Sir : 

Mr. Scott Clark greatly regrets that he will be unable to 

keep the appointment you so kindly made for ten o'clock this 

morning, as he has been suddenly called from the city by the 

illness of his wife at Cincinnati. Doubtless when he returns 

he will ask you for a renewal of your courtesy. 

Very truly yours, (70 words) 

John Raymond, Sec. 

"Will" after "he" is correct. 



9 



(address and date) 



Mr. John Raymond, Sec, 

Brattleford Hotel, Columbus, Ohio. 
Dear Sir: 

I wish you would express to Mr. Clark my deep regret to 
hear of the illness of his wife. I hope it may not be serious, 
and that I shall have the pleasure of seeing him in a few 
days. 

Yours truly, (54 words) 

Abner McKinley. 



CHAPTER III 

How to Close a Business Letter 

17. When you have finished a letter it is generally suffi- 
cient to stop and sign. Many think they must lug in some 
such conclusion as "Trusting this will be satisfactory, we beg 
to remain/' or at any rate something in which "we remain" 
is a part. "Thanking you for your order, Very truly yours/' 
is correct enough, as the subject and verb "I am" or "we 
are" are clearly implied. 

18. The complimentary close of a business letter is usually 
"Yours truly," "Truly yours," "Very truly yours," "Very 
truly," or the like. "Eespectfully yours" is too stiff and 
antiquated to be used except when writing to a very digni- 
fied superior, as in applying for a position or the like. 
"Cordially yours" is the extreme of friendliness, appropriate 
when there is a personal relation between the writer and per- 
son written to, or when for business purposes such a friend- 
liness is assumed. It would be inappropriate when a letter 
is signed by a corporation name. "Sincerely yours" should 
be reserved for letters of real friendship. 

19. Notice that only the first word of the complimentary 
close is capitalized. This complimentary close should begin 
about a third of the way across the page, and the signature 
should begin below it, a little to the right, at a point a trifle 
more than half way across the page from left to right. The 
signature should be followed by a period, the complimentary 
close by a comma. 

20. The name should be signed in ink, except a corpora- 
tion name, which may be typewritten and should be fol- 

130 



HOW TO CLOSE A BUSINESS LETTER 131 

lowed by the initials of the individual writer, or by his full 
name preceded by "By" (not "per"). The name of an in- 
dividual should either be written by hand or, in cases in 
which this is not possible, stamped with a rubber facsimile 
of handwriting. All contract letters should be carefully 
signed with ink, and corporation names (which are best 
typewritten) should be followed by the name of the in- 
dividual written after "By." 

An unmarried lady should put "Miss" before her name 
in parenthesis, thus — "(Miss) Jane Jones." A married lady 
may sign her name and follow it with her husband's preceded 
by "Mrs.," the whole in parentheses, as "Jane Jones Smith 
(Mrs. James Smith)/' or write her husband's name pre- 
ceded by "Mrs." in parentheses, or her own name preceded 
by "Mrs." 

21. When the name and address of the person written to 
have not been placed at the beginning of the letter, they 
should be placed at the close, on a line below the signature, 
beginning flush with the left-hand margin, the address being 
placed in a second line that is indented half an inch or more. 

22. When a postscript is added, either to state something 
forgotten or with deliberate purpose of making the thing 
spoken of attract attention, it should begin with an inden- 
tion, like a paragraph, "P. S." being followed immediately by 
what is to be said, and a second signature of initials placed at 
the end without any complimentary close. 

Good Models for Opening and Closing 

The International Sawdust Co., 

Newark, N. J. 
Gentlemen : Yours truly, 

Francis Bien. 



132 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Sarah H. Parmenter, 

Lincoln, 111. 

Dear Madam : 

Very truly yours, 

The International Sawdust Co. 
Miss Elsie Simons, 

56 Lake St., Chicago. 
Dear Madam : 

Yours truly, 

Montgomery Ward & Co. 
Mr. W. C. Thorne, 

Gen. Mgr. Montgomery Ward & Co., Chicago. 
Dear Sir: (Apply for position.) 

Kespectfully yours, 

John J. Farnum. 
Dear Mr. Jennings: 

Cordially yours, 

Mr. John Jennings, Edward Manley. 

Buckley, Colo. 

Dear Charley : 

Sincerely yours, 
To Mr. Chas. Burnham, John J. Jennings. 

15 Bue Scribe, Paris, France. 

My dear Mrs. Blank : 

Very truly yours, 

Mrs. James H. Blank, Henry Goodrich. 

5617 Grand Blvd., Chicago. 

Note. Squaring up the name and address before the saluta- 
tion is now fashionable in typewritten letters, but not in pen-writ- 
ten letters. 



HOW TO CLOSE A BUSINESS LETTER 133 

10 
401 Atlantic Ave., Brooklyn, N. Y., 
April 9, 1919. 
Mr. John Wanarnaker, 

New York City, N. Y. 
Dear Sir: 

A few days ago I called at your store and purchased a 
lamp, some toweling, and two or three books, which were 
to be delivered to my house not later than the next day. I 
have not yet received them. Please look the matter up at 
once and see that the goods are delivered without further 
delay. I paid $4.35. 

Yours truly, (64 words) 

(Mrs.) William Fullerton. 



A married woman may sign either her own given name (with 
or without Mrs. in parentheses before it — without when she is 
known — with when she is not known) or her husband's name with 
Mrs. before it in parenthesis. This usage prevails more in the 
Eastern states than in the Western, where women like to keep their 
own names. 



11 

(Letter-head) April 11, 1919. 
Mrs. William Fullerton, 

401 Atlantic Ave., Brooklyn, N. Y. 
Dear Madam : 

We are very sorry to learn that the goods ordered by you 
were not delivered promptly. We have made a diligent 
search for them, but have failed to find them. Possibly, how- 
ever, they have already come into your hands. If you have 
not received them, please repeat the order and we will fill it 
again without further delay. 



134 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

We sincerely regret the inconvenience you have suffered, 
and hope the refilling of the order now will meet your needs. 
Very truly yours, (81 words) 

John Wananiaker, 

By A. W. E., Complaint Dept. 

"By" is better than "per" at the close of a letter, as "per" is 
Latin and should not be used with English words. We say "per 
diem" but "a day." "Per A. W. E." would not even be good Latin. 

The short sentences in this letter are much neater and more 
expressive than one or two long sentences would be. 

12 

401 Atlantic Ave., Brooklyn, N. Y., 
April 12, 1919. 
Mr. John Wanamaker, 
New York City, N. Y. 
Dear Sir: 

I have been compelled to repurchase here in Brooklyn 
most of the things ordered at your store some time ago and 
not delivered to me. I must therefore ask you to refund 
the amount paid — f 4.35. 

Yours truly, (39 words) 

(Mrs.) William Fullerton. 

Notice the dash. The transition from "amount paid" to the 
sum in figures is abrupt, and abrupt transitions always require the 
dash. 

13 

(Letter-head) April 16, 1919. 
Mrs. William Fullerton, 

401 Atlantic Ave., Brooklyn, N. Y. 
Dear Madam : 

We are very sorry indeed for the inconvenience caused 



HOW TO CLOSE A BUSINESS LETTER 135 

you by the loss of the goods you had ordered and paid for. 
We have done everything we can to trace them, but have not 
yet found out where they went, or by whose fault they were 
miscarried. 

We inclose our check for $4.35, the amount paid by you, 
and trust that this accident will not deter you from giving us 
your valuable patronage on future occasions, when we shall 
hope to be more fortunate in serving you. 

Kindly sign the inclosed receipt and return it to us in the 
accompanying envelope. 

Once more expressing our sincere regret for this unfor- 
tunate experience of yours, we beg to remain 

Yours very truly, (124 words) 

John Wanamaker, 

By A. W. E., Complaint Dept. 

Make a new paragraph for every new idea. The first paragraph 
contains "regrets," the second paragraph the settlement. 

The old-fashioned formal close, "we beg to remain," does not 
seem out of place in a letter of high dignity such as this, but the 
best letter writers carefully avoid this form of closing. Say 
simply, "Permit us to say again how sincerely we regret your 
unfortunate experience. Yours very truly." 



CHAPTER IV 

The Body of the Letter 

23. It is always desirable to make some reference to the 
letter which is being answered, referring to it by its date, 
but it is decidedly better to make this reference incidentally, 
not formally. Avoid all such stereotyped opening phrases as 
"Replying to your esteemed favor of the 16th inst.," "An- 
swering your favor of even date/' "Acknowledging your let- 
ter of the 17th ult. ? " etc. Say rather "We desire to thank 
you for the suggestion contained in your letter of the 16th 
inst," or u The goods ordered in your letter of Jan. 19 will 
be shipped at once," or "We regret that you did not find our 
last shipment satisfactory, as you state in your letter of the 
17th just at hand." The variations should be as wide as the 
requirements of business, and no set form or series of forms 
should be used. In contract letters the date of the letter an- 
swered should always be given, else a series of letters may 
fail to constitute a legal contract. In many cases there is 
no necessity whatever for referring to the date of the letter 
answered. In contract letters the two ciphers standing 
for no cents should always be inserted, but in other letters 
it is better to omit them. 

24. When several items are ordered in one letter, it is 
always desirable to place them in a list or column, following 
each item with its number, size mark, and price if possible, 
even when the price is well known. Stating the price often 
saves mistakes, and is to be looked on as an important 
part of the description, 

25. Paragraphs should be indented three-quarters of an 
inch or more. Each fresh subject should have a fresh para- 

136 . 



THE BODY OF THE LETTER 137 

graph. It is a mistake to indent paragraphs either too lit- 
tle or too much. In typewritten letters there is a new 
fashion of indicating paragraphs by a blank line after sin- 
gle-spaced matter, and not indenting the paragraph at all. 
If the typewriting is double spaced, this method cannot be 
used. 

Words to Be Avoided in Business Letters 

26. All stereotyped words which are not used in talking 
should be avoided in letter writing. There is an idea that a 
certain peculiar commercial jargon is appropriate in busi- 
ness letters. The fact is, nothing injures business more than 
this system of words found only in business letters. The 
test of a word or phrase or method of expression should be, 
"Is it what I should say to my customer if I were talking to 
him instead of writing to him?" 

Among these words to be tabooed are — 

the same (used as a pronoun, as in "referring to same") ; 

said (as in "said list of goods," a legal phrase j ; 

esteemed ; 

valued ; 

hereby, herewith (used excessively, though sometimes to 
be justified) ; 

funds (for "money") ; 

beg to advise; 

beg to remain ; 

per (for "by") ; 

attached (when there is no real "attachment," as in "list 
with prices attached") ; 

hand you (for "inclose") ; 

trusting (used excessively) ; 

trusting this information may be entirely satisfactory (a 
phrase worked to death, and so deprived of meaning). 



138 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Postal Information 

27. Be careful in addressing envelopes, and especially see 
that abbreviations are very clear. Always use the abbrevia- 
tions of states authorized by the Postoffice Department, as 
Calif, for California to avoid confusion with Col. for Colo- 
rado, N. Dak. and S. Dak. for North and South Dakota in- 
stead of S. D. and N. D., Penn. for Pennsylvania instead of 
Pa., and Conn, for Connecticut instead of Ct. Ohio, Iowa, 
Utah, and Idaho should not be abbreviated. Never under 
any circumstances abbreviate the names of towns or cities. 

28. If your name and address are on the outside of the 
envelope or wrapper, the postoffice authorities will notify 
you promptly in case you have made a mistake. Make 
it a point always to have your address on the envelope or 
wrapper. 

29. Remember that all waiting, except the name and ad- 
dress of the person written to and the name and address of 
the sender, requires first-class postage at the rate of tw r o 
cents for each ounce, except in the case of a postal card. 
(Penalty is $10 for each violation.) A penciled note on the 
inside of a newspaper renders you liable to a fine if you 
attempt to send it without letter postage. Anything that is 
sealed or cannot be easily examined is subject to letter 
postage. 

30. Unsealed printed matter goes at the rate of one cent 
for two ounces, or just double the weight of first-class mat- 
ter for two cents, except books weighing more than eight 
ounces and second-class newspapers (the latter require one 
cent for four ounces). 

31. The rate of two cents for one ounce on first-class mat- 
ter applies not only to all parts of the United States, but to 
Porto Kico, Cuba, Panama Canal Zone, the Philippine 
Islands, Shanghai (China), w T here there is a special United 



THE BODY OF THE LETTER 139 

States station, and to all parts of Canada, Mexico, and Great 
Britain. 

32. Other foreign letters require 5c for the first ounce and 
3c for each subsequent ounce. If the postage is not prepaid 
in full the person who receives the letters on the other side 
must pay double the shortage. That is, if the weight is over 
an ounce and only a five-cent stamp has been attached, the 
receiver of the letter will have to pay six cents additional. 
This always offends foreign customers. 

Rule. Always write u 5c" on the corner of the envelope of 
a foreign letter as soon as the envelope is addressed. When 
the stamp is pasted on, this "5c" will remind you, and the 
stamp can cover the figure. This prevents the very common 
mistake of sending foreign letters w T ith domestic postage. 



14 

(Letter-head) April 3, 1919. 
Mr. C. O. Cottrell, 

Board of Trade Bldg., Cincinnati, Ohio. 
Dear Sir: 

I am very sorry to hear that the Instruction Cards have 
not reached you, and am at a loss to know what has caused 
the miscarriage. We are sending you duplicates today, how- 
ever, and trust they will be received promptly, and you will 
find them all you had anticipated. 

Please accept my sympathy and regret, whosever the fault 
may have been, for I very well appreciate the annoyance 
which the delay has caused you. 
Believe me, 

Cordially yours, (80 words) 

Sherwin Cody, 
Director School of English. 



140 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

"Bldg." is usually written as a regular abbreviation, though 
strictly speaking it is a contraction and should be written with 
apostrophes (B'ld'g). 

In a letter like this it is not necessary to mention the date of 
the letter that is being answered. It is well to have the habit 
of always mentioning the date of a letter referred to; but when the 
construction of a sentence can be improved by omitting it, there is 
no objection to doing so. 

We capitalize words used as the special name of anything the 
business house is especially advertising. "Instruction cards" would 
not be capitalized in a letter written by any one other than the 
firm that published them. 

15 
(Letter-head) Feb. 4, 1919, 
Mr. Charles Oakley, 

3 Dearborn Ave., Denver, Colo. 
Dear Sir: 

We are very sorry to know of the defect in one of the 
books sent you, and hasten to forward another copy by mail 
today. Please do not trouble to return the imperfect volume, 
but dispose of it as you see fit. 

Errors will occur in the bindery, in spite of the utmost 
care on our part, and we can only ask the indulgence of our 
customers when we are unfortunate enough to send out im- 
perfect goods. We regret the annoyance caused you, and 
trust you will find the new volume perfect in every way. 

Thanking you for calling our attention to the matter, we 
are 

Very truly yours, (111 words) 

A. C. McClurg & Co., 



This shows the style of writing a firm name on the typewriter 
when some department manager is to sign his name or initials with 
pen and ink. 



THE BODY OF THE LETTER 141 

No comma is required after "we are" because the sentence is 
"we are yours." 

16 . 

(Letter-head) Mar. 21, 1919. 
Mr. James Markham, 

Des Moines, Iowa. 
Dear Sir: 

Thank you for remittance of $5 and order for a calculator. 
There seems to be a misunderstanding on your part, how- 
ever, in regard to the machine you wish. You order the Ad- 
dington Calculator, winch is f 15, as you see in the circular 
and price-list which we are inclosing. We have marked the 
item in blue. Possibly you intended to order the Locke 
Adder, price of which is |5. We have checked the descrip- 
tion in the circular. 

Shall we send you the Locke Adder? Or will you remit 
the §10 additional which is required to cover the Addington 
Calculator? 

We appreciate your order, and trust the matter may be 
adjusted satisfactorily. We hold the |5 to your credit. 
Very truly yours, (123 words) 

Abbott & Co. 



Many business letter writers capitalize the names of all special 
articles which they themselves handle. They would capitalize 
"Calculator" in the first sentence of this letter. There does not 
seem sufficient reason for doing this. We capitalize "Addington 
Calculator," because it is the particular name of one make of 
machine. 

We hyphenized "price-list" because it is a single name. 

When the firm name is typewritten, as in this letter, initials of 
the writer may simply be written below in ink. No blank line is 
required. 



142 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

17 

(Letter-head) July 6, 1919. 
The Lakeside Printing Company, 

14 William St., New York City, N. Y. 
Gentlemen : 

In checking over your bill we find that you have charged 
us |8.50 too much. Your bill is based on the estimate we 
made in advance, but the matter did not hold out as esti- 
mated, and on measuring up the galleys inclosed we find but 
46,000 ems, which at 40 cents a thousand would make $18.40, 
whereas your bill calls for $27. 

Kindly correct the bill, and oblige 

Yours truly, (70 words) 

18 

314 W. 59th St., New York City, 
May 7, 1919. 
Crawford-Simpson Dept. Store, 

New York, N. Y. 
Gentlemen : 

In looking over your bill I see that you have charged me 
on April 18 with an item amounting to $3.25, and have failed 
to give credit for the goods when returned. Please look the 
matter up and send credit memorandum for the amount, on 
receipt of which your bill will be paid. 

Yours truly, (56 words) 

It would be better to write out "Dept."; but that would make 
the address line too long to look well in a letter. 



CHAPTER V 

Applying for a Position 

In writing an application for a position, always use good 
paper. Nothing offends a business man so much as an ap- 
plication written on a scrap of paper or an old pad. 

Be extremely neat and accurate in arrangement, punctua- 
tion, and use of words. 

When there are many applications for one position, of 
course not all can be successful, and no rule can be given for 
a letter that will be sure to draw a response. 

A well known Chicago business man says he advises all ap- 
plicants for positions in response to blind advertisements to 
say simply, "Please grant interview." If there were many 
applicants and all used the same form, clearly the advertiser 
could not tell the difference between them, but would give 
the preference to a clear, neat letter, with just the informa- 
tion in it which he wanted. 

The form to use in answering a blind newspaper adver- 
tisement is as follows, with no salutation and no complimen- 
tary close : 
P E 310, Chicago Tribune : 

Please grant interview. I believe I have the exact quali- 
fications you require. Allen Hasbrouck, 

1435 Diversey Boul., Chicago. 



143 



144 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

19 

527 Chicago Opera House, 1 

Chicago, 111., Feb. 1, 1919. 
Messrs. 2 Marshall Field & Co. 3 , 

State and Washington Sts., Chicago. 4 
Gentlemen : 5 

I wish to apply for the position of advertising manager 
as advertised in Printer's Ink, Jan. 26. 

6 1 am a graduate of Amherst College, class of 1889, and 
had an especially thorough training in English. 

As private secretary to Hon. John Bigelow in 1891, and to 
Senator W. E. Chandler in 1892, I handled large amounts of 
correspondence to the satisfaction of those gentlemen, and 
can refer you to them. 

In 1900 I assumed charge of the advertising of the Globe 
Department Store at Peoria, this state, and continued in that 
position until about six weeks ago, when I sold out my in- 
terests and came to Chicago. 

I know very well, gentlemen, that there is a wide differ- 
ence between the Globe Department Store at Peoria and 
Marshall Field's in Chicago; but I took that store when its 
business amounted to only f 25,000 a year, and built it up till 
its business last year exceeded |250,000. The present man- 
ager will tell you that my advertising day by day added to 
the sales till in 1918 they were more than ten times what 
they were in 1900. I feel that I have it in me to go on and 
make your business grow in the same way; and I ask you 
to give me a chance to prove my worth. I have much to 
learn, but I want to learn, and I'm willing to work fourteen 
hours a day. 

Respectfully yours, 7 



APPLYING FOR A POSITION 145 

Review Notes 

1. Place the date line (which should give your exact address 
in full) on the right hand side of the page. Never begin to the left 
of the middle of the page. Place a comma after each item — but 
notice that the street number and street, or room number and build- 
ing ("527 Chicago Opera House," "156 Wabash Ave.") form one 
single item and need no commas except at the end; and that the 
month and day of the month ("Feb. 1") form one item and 
should not have a comma between them. Place a period after the 
year. 

2. It is better to use "Mr." or "Messrs." or "Mrs." or "Miss" 
before any personal name addressed. Impersonal names, such as 
"International Harvester Co.," "Success" (magazine), "The Smith- 
Jones Company," do not require a title before them, though in Eng- 
land "The System Company" would be addressed as "Messrs. Sys- 
tem Company." Never write "Mess." for "Messrs." 

3. Place a comma after the name. If the name ends with an 
abbreviation such as "Co.," the comma must follow the period — 
always use both comma and period. If end punctuation is omitted 
as a matter of smart up-to-date style, this must be done consistently 
in all cases. 

4. Each item in the address of the person or persons written to 
should be set off by a comma, but no comma is required between the 
street and street number. At the end of the address place nothing 
but a period. If the address ends with a period to mark an abbre- 
viation, as "Chicago, 111.," it is not necessary to use any other 
punctuation. 

If the address ends with a full word such as "Chicago," the 
period is now preferred, or nothing at all. 

5. The formal address should be either "Dear Sir," "Dear 
Madam," or "Gentlemen." Never use "Dear Sirs" for the plural. 
"Sir" and "Madam" are written with a capital letter in spite of 
the modern tendency to do away with as many capitals as possible. 

6. Make a new paragraph for every distinct thing you want to 
say or impress upon the reader of your letter. Always indent 
paragraphs in pen-written letters half to three-quarters of an inch. 
Notice that the first line of the body of a letter is now treated as 
a paragraph, and paragraphs following should be indented just the 
same. Always leave a margin of an inch of blank paper at the 



146 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

left of your sheet, and it is better to leave a wide blank space 
around the writing — 1% inches in the case of typewritten letters. 

Compare Par. 17, Chap. II. 

7. Do not place a comma after "I am" at the close of a 
letter, as there is no break in the sentence (only a break to the 
eye), but you should place a comma after the complimentary close, 
before the name is written. 

Capitalize only the first word of the complimentary close — never 
any others. 

20 
A Poor Letter Applying for a Position 

156/ Wabash/ Ave., Chicago, 111. 
Feb., 1 6, 1919. 
Montgomery Ward & Co., 2 

3 Gentlemeii : 4 I see 5 your ad. 6 in the Tribune today say- 
ing you want a correspondent. 1 have been working 7 in a 
grocery store for some time past, but as I find the work too 
heavy for me, I should like to get a good inside position. 8 I 
graduated at the grammar school two years ago, and have 
been considered a pretty fair 9 letter writer. At any rate I 
should like to have you try me if you are willing to pay a 
fair 9 salary. 10 

Hoping to hear from you by return mail, I am 

Yours Truly, 11 

Bartie Jones. 

1. None of these commas are needed. See the model below. 

2. Never omit the address. 

3. When the address is put in, this will come back to the 
left hand margin. 

4. Make a new line for this, beginning just below the colon. 

5. Not wrong, but sounds as if it might have been used for 
"saw" or "have seen." It is not necessary to state formally that 
you have seen this advertisement. Refer to it incidentally. 

6.. Do not abbreviate in a letter of this kind. 

7. The writer could not have made a more tactless statement. 
If a correspondent is wanted, it is no recommendation to say you 
have been a grocery clerk. 



APPLYING FOR A POSITION 147 

8. This sounds as if the writer were looking for a "soft snap." 
Be careful not to tell all your personal reflections. Keep some 
things to yourself. 

9. Don't repeat "fair." Look over the letter to see if you 
have used any word too often. 

10. This is another foolish statement. Do not speak of salary 
till you have an offer. There will be time enough then to refuse a 
salary too small. 

11. "Truly" should not be capitalized. 

The Same Letter Rewritten 

156 Wabash Ave., Chicago, Feb. 6, 1919. 
Messrs. Montgomery Ward & Co., 

116 Michigan Ave., Chicago, 111. 
Gentlemen : 

I wish to apply for the position of correspondent which 
you advertise in today's Tribune. 

I have had considerable experience in my father's office, 
where I have answered many of the letters on my own re- 
sponsibility. I am a rapid typewriter operator, and am accus- 
tomed to writing my own letters on the machine. Lawyers 
for whom I have done copying say I am remarkably accurate. 
I have a good knowledge of English, and express my ideas 
readily. 

I am very anxious to obtain a position in a large house 
where it will pay to work hard for advancement. I have not 
had as much experience as I could wish; but I feel sure I 
can do your work satisfactorily, though possibly I shall be 
a little slow at first. What I do, however, you can depend 
on my doing faithfully. 

I trust you will give me a fair trial, at whatever salary 
you think reasonable. 

Respectfully yours, 

Bartholomew Jones. 



148 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

A young man who applies for a position in a spirit like this, 
though he has had no experience and can give no reference (if he 
has references of course he should add them), is pretty likely to be 
given a chance to show what he can do. In writing a letter of this 
kind, think what the employer wants, think what will please him, 
and show him any of your own qualities which you know he will 
approve, passing lightly over anything you know he will not like. 
More depends on the spirit which the letter shows than on any other 
one thing. The qualities most in demand are — quickness, faith- 
fulness, and common sense. Remember these three things, and do 
what you can to prove you have them. 



CHAPTER VI 

Sending Money by Mail 

Amounts under one dollar may usually be sent in one-cent 
or two-cent postage stamps. Never under any circumstances 
send United States stamps to Canada, Mexico, Cuba, or any 
foreign country, because they cannot be used there. Also 
never send stamps of a higher denomination than two cents, 
for it is often difficult to use or to dispose of such stamps. 

In sending stamps, always put a piece of oiled paper over 
the gummed side of the stamps, so that if the letter gets damp 
in the mails the stamps will not be closely stuck to the sides 
of the letter or to each other. 

It is usually safe enough to send a dollar or two-dollar 
bill in an ordinary letter, but it is wisest to register all let- 
ters containing money. Any letter-carrier will receive a 
letter to be registered, and give a receipt for it. 

Sums of money from five dollars up should be sent either 
as a check, bank draft, express money order, or United 
States money order. 

If a private check is sent from any point except New York 
or Chicago, ten or fifteen cents should usually be added to 
pay bank collection charges. 

Persons who have private checking accounts can usually 
procure bank drafts of the bank cashier without charge. 
Such drafts are always safe to send. 

Express money orders, when they can be obtained con- 
veniently, are better than United States money orders, for it 
is easier for the person who receives them to get them cashed, 
and if they are lost you can yet your money back much more 

149 



150 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

easily than from the Postoffice. They cost about the same 
as the Postoffice money orders. 

In making a remittance, always be sure to state in your 
letter in exactly what form you are sending the money, 
whether stamps, bills, check, or the like. 

A check, draft, or money order should be fastened to the 
front of the letter at the toj3. It is usually best to inclose 
stamps in another envelope, writing on that envelope the 
amount inclosed. This entire envelope should then be in- 
serted in the letter. 

Banks commonly charge five or ten cents exchange on 
out-of-town checks, and this should be added to the remit- 
tance when a private check is used. 

Inclosing Money 

21 

(Letter-head) May iO, 1919. 
Messrs. Dodd, Mead & Co., Publishers, 

New York City, N. Y. 
Gentlemen : 

I inclose money order for $1.50, and request you to send 
me postpaid a copy of "Janice Meredith." 

Incl. Yours truly, (29 words) 



Any word like "Publishers" placed after a name to help the 
post-office department find the firm when the street number is not 
given, is treated as a title, and should always be capitalized. As 
it is looked on as part of the address, however, the use of such 
a title does not violate the rule that only one title can be used with 
a name. 

Whenever an inclosure is made with a letter, the letter should 
have written at the end, "inch," or "2 incl. ,, "3 incl." if there are 
several inclosures. "Inc." is also correct for the abbreviation. 



SENDING MONEY BY MAIL 151 

22 
(Letter-head) Jan. 3, 1919. 
Bassett Typewriter Company, 

59 Dearborn St., Chicago, 111. 
Gentlemen : 

Mr. Cody requests me to send you the inclosed check for 
$5 to cover attached bill. Kindly acknowledge receipt. 
Incl. Yours truly, (22 words) 

23 

Oakley, 111., Nov. 3, 1919. 
Success Magazine, 

Washington Square, New York City, N. Y. 
Gentlemen : 

I inclose a $2 bill for Success for one year, beginning with 
the next number. 

Inci. Yours truly, (18 words) 

24 
425 Rookery, Chicago, May 4, 1919. 
Frank A. Munsey Publishing Company, 

New York City, N. Y. 
Gentlemen : 

I wish to take advantage of your premium offer of the 
Munsey Magazine one year and the Booklover's Shakspere 
for $6, express money order for which I inclose. I should 
like to have the subscription to the magazine begin with the 
next number. I shall expect to receive the copy of the Book- 
lover's Shakspere at an early date. 

Incl. Very truly yours, (62 words) 

We capitalize the word "Magazine" as well as "Munsey," be- 
cause it is part of the name. Names like these may be inclosed in 
quotation marks, or underscored; but when they are quite common, 
as these are, the capitals are sufficient distinction. The best 
authorities dispense with quotation marks or italics. 



CHAPTER VII 

Ordering Goods 

In ordering goods be sure to— 

1. Make a list, or arrange in a column, if there are sev- 
eral items, to avoid confusion. 

2. Give sizes, styles, and all other details you possibly 
can, or clearly explain precisely what you want. 

3. State how money is sent, or how you intend to make 
payment. 

4. Indicate whether shipment is to be made by mail, ex- 
press, or freight. Remember that if goods are to be sent by 
mail money should accompany the order, including an allow- 
ance for the postage. 

The letter cannot be too brief, but it must be clear and 
complete. 

25 
A Poor Letter Ordering Goods. 

Siegel, Cooper & Co., Shelbyville, 1 Feb. 8, 1919. 

2 Chicago, 111. 

Dear Sirs : 3 

Please send as soon as possible Rand, McNally's atlas, 4 a 
dozen handkerchiefs, five cakes of soap, and some writing 
paper and a half a dozen pens. Send as soon as you can, 5 
and I will pay when the things come. 6 

Yours truly, 

Martha Martin. 
152 



ORDERING GOODS 153 

1. The address is not sufficient, since the state is omitted. If 
the town is small, always give the county. 

2. Always give the street address when you can. 

3. Never write "Dear Sirs" for "Gentlemen." It is old- 
fashioned. 

4. Rand, McNally & Co. publish many atlases at many prices, 
and it would be impossible to know from this statement what was 
wanted. There are many grades of handkerchiefs, many brands of 
soap, and a great variety of paper and pens. Not a single item in 
this order could be intelligently supplied. 

5. This is practically a repetition of the language with which 
the letter opens. 

6. Goods are not usually shipped to a distance unless at least 
some part of the price is paid in advance. In any case, there 
should be a clear statement as to just how the goods should be 
shipped, whether by mail, express, or freight, unless there is a free 
wagon delivery from a large local store. 

The Same Letter Properly Written. 

Shelbyville, Ind., Feb. 8, 1919. 

Messrs. Siegel, Cooper & Co., 

State and Van Buren Sts., Chicago, 111. 
Gentlemen : 

Please send as soon as possible the following: 

1 Hand, McNally & Co.'s Popular Atlas of the World, $4 ; 

1 doz. ladies' white linen handkerchiefs, the best value you 
have at about 25c each ; 

6 cakes Glycerine soap, 15c a cake, 4 for 50c ; 

A box of ladies' cream notepaper and envelopes, rough 
finish, unruled, about 50c, or any special value you have of 
this grade. 

I inclose money order for flO, and will ask you to refund 
any balance in my favor or prepay express charges. 

Yours truly, 

Incl. M. O. (Miss) Martha Martin. 



154 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Notice in regard to this letter — 

1. That while it is not necessary to prefix "Messrs." to a firm 
name, it bespeaks your culture and education, as well as your 
courteous disposition, to do it. 

2. When different articles are ordered, each item should be 
given a line by itself — that is, should be made a paragraph, even if, 
as in this case, the various items are separated by semicolons and 
form parts of a single sentence. This is a case in which the sen- 
tence includes several paragraphs. 

3. Observe that items of this sort should be separated by semi- 
colons, while after the last one you place a period. The semicolon 
means, in a practical way, "There is more to come/' while the 
period means, "This is the last item." 

4. Always describe what you want so fully that you are sure 
the clerk will know exactly what to send you. Never send an order 
by mail for something you are yourself in doubt about. It is bet- 
ter to write first for information. 

5. Many women have an idea that it is independent to sign 
initials (so that a stranger receiving a letter does not know whether 
it comes from a man or a woman), or else the simple given name 
without Miss or Mrs.; but the only courteous w T ay is to relieve the 
stranger of the embarrassment of guessing whether you are married 
or single, and avoid ridiculous blunders by writing Miss or Mrs. 
before the name in parentheses. Only vulgar people write it with- 
out the parentheses. 



ORDERING GOODS 155 

26 

Boston, Pa., July 11, 1919. 
Messrs. Jones Bros., 
Philadelphia, Pa. 

Gentlemen : 

I inclose money order for $9.70, and will ask you kindly 

to send me by express at once the following : 

1 pair F. B. Corsets, size 21 $3.00 

1 doz. Ladies' all-linen Handkerchiefs 2.00 
1 spool Coats's white No. 36 Cotton, 1 spool black 

No. 40, 1 spool tan-brown No. 60 .25 

1 pair White Canvas Shoes, size 5 D 2.45 

4 boxes small note-size Ladies' Stationery 2.00 



$9.70 
Yours truly, 

(Miss) Mabel Fellows. 

P. S. I have a watch that will not run. Do you do 
watch-repairing? What do you charge for watch oil? Per- 
haps my watch needs only a little oil to make it go. M. F. 

Inc.. (108 words) 

Notice the colon after "the following." No semicolons appear 
after the items, because the prices at the ends of the lines serve 
well enough to mark the close of the description of the items, and 
semicolons would be confusing. The name words are capitalized but 
not the descriptive words. This is the style commonly used in 
writing invoices. 

Observe that the $ sign appears at the top of the column before 
the amount of the first item, and before the entire sum at the bot- 
tom. Omission of the $ sign altogether is not desirable. 

"Inclose" and "enclose," "indorse" and "endorse," are both 
right according to different dictionaries. Stick to one style, how- 
ever. 



CHAPTER VIII 

"Hurry-Up" Letters 

The business man wants to know "how to use words so as 
to make people do things." 

One of the things he often wishes to do is to get the goods 
he has ordered before he has been put to great inconvenience 
by the delay. 

The writer of such letters first of all should try to find out 
what the matter is, and who is responsible, and in general 
get a specific promise, and then worry the man if he fails 
to keep his promise. Such letters must be slightly irritating, 
but always within the range of business courtesy. 



27 

(Letter-head) May 10, 1919. 
Messrs. John N. Thomas & Co., 

56 State St., Chicago, 111. 
Gentlemen : 

I have failed to hear anything from you today in regard 
to my suit, which you promised to have ready for me to try 
on this morning. 

Kindly telephone me on receipt of this just where the work 
now is, so that I may know what I can depend on. 

Yours truly, (52 words) 

Hampton Ehodes. 



156 



"HURRY-UP" LETTERS 157 

28 

(Letter-head) Mar. 26, 1919. 
The Grand Rapids Furniture Co., 

Grand Rapids, Mich. 
Gentlemen : 

Will you kindly let us know by return mail just when you 
expect to be able to ship our order Xo. 4568 for one of your 
Xo. 46 sideboards, to be sent direct to our customer, James 
Oakley, Pocahontas, Mont. ? . . 

Our customer wishes to get this sideboard at the earliest 
moment, and we have promised to hurry it up as much as 
possible. Please let us know at once just what you can do. 

Yours truly, (76 words) 

Montgomery Ward & Co. 

"Co." instead of the full "Company" may perhaps be justified in 
this letter on the ground that the name would stretch out too long if 
the word were written in full. 

The sign £ for No. is allowable, if not indeed preferable, in 
typewritten letters, but never at the beginning of a sentence. 

However many times you write to a firm about an order, always 
give a full statement of it, with numbers, etc., to facilitate looking 
up in the files. When you write to a person or firm you know has 
so few orders that there can be no confusion, this formality may 
be dispensed with. 

29 

(Letter-head) April 3, 1919. 
The Grand Rapids Furniture Co., 

Grand Rapids, Mich. 
Gentlemen : 

On March 10 we sent you an order for one of your Xo. 46 
sideboards, to be shipped direct to our customer, James 
Oakley, Pocahontas, Mont, We have written you, asking 



158 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

when you could make shipment, but have heard nothing 
whatever from you. 

Now, gentlemen, nearly a month has passed. You have 
at least had time to answer our inquiries. We must insist 
on immediate and satisfactory information in regard to this 
order. 

Yours truly, (75 words) 

Montgomery Ward & Co. 

30 

(Letter-head) April 20, 1918. 
The Grand Rapids Furniture Co., 

Grand Rapids, Mich. 
Gentlemen : 

On March 10 we sent you an order for one of your No. 46 
sideboards to be shipped direct to our customer, Mr. James 
Oakley, Pocahontas, Mont. On March 26 and April 3 we 
w^rote in regard to the filling of this order. In reply to the 
second of these letters you wrote that the sideboard would 
go forward immediately. 

More than two weeks have passed, and yet we have not 
received your invoice, or any intimation that the sideboard 
has been shipped. We confess that we fail wholly to under- 
stand the meaning of this unexplained and inexcusable delay. 
We have had repeated complaints from our customer, and he 
threatens to cancel his order and demand the return of his 
money unless the sideboard reaches him within the next 
week. If Mr. Oakley refuses to receive the sideboard when 
it reaches him, we shall hold you accountable and charge you 
with freight both ways. 

Yours truly, (156 words) 

Montgomery Ward & Co. 



CHAPTER IX 

How Money Is Collected 

Success in collecting money by mail depends on knowing 
your person and using briefly just the right arguments. 

Be courteous and masterful at all times. If you think 
long and carefully in advance what you want to say, and 
then say it as briefly as possible, you will probably have the 
right style. 

A dead beat you must threaten with the terrors and ex- 
penses of the law. 

An honest man or woman who is short of money you must 
coax and appeal to by sympathetic argument. 

Above all, you must never offend a good customer. To 
force the pajmient of money and not drive a customer away is 
the highest art in writing collection letters. 

Most business houses use three or four different letters, 
the first a simple, brief request, the second a longer and 
stronger letter, and the third a threat to place the account 
in the hands of a lawyer if payment is not made without 
further delay. 

31 

Collection Forms 
Dear Sir: 

You have evidently overlooked our account, for which in 
the usual course we should have received check on the 15th. 
If we do not hear from you before, we shall draw on you on 
the 20th, and trust you will honor the draft. 
Very truly yours, 
159 



160 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

32 

Dear Sir: 

We were disappointed not to receive check from you on 
the 20th. Our outstanding accounts are particularly large 
at this season, and it is absolutely necessary for us to make 
some collections in order to carry our current expenditures. 
Will you not make a special effort to send us some sort of 
remittance to help us on our pay-roll Saturday? We shall 
consider it a favor on your part if you will give this matter 
special and immediate attention. 

Cordially yours, 

33 
Dear Sir: 

We inclose statement of your account, which has now been 
running three months. You certainly cannot deny that we 
have been very lenient with you. It is our policy to extend 
every favor that we can. But if we are going to do business, 
we must have money to do it with. We feel that you owe it 
to us in all fairness to do something to help us out. The 
account is not large, but it is important to us. Accommoda- 
tion, you know, must be mutual; we have done our best to 
accommodate you, and we think you must realize that you 
ought to do something for us. Will you not take this up 
seriously and let us hear from you by return mail ? At least 
let us know just what we can count on, so that we may ar- 
range our obligations in such a way that we can meet them. 
Very truly yours, 



HOW MONEY IS COLLECTED 161 

34 

(Letterhead) Chicago, Jan. 11, 1919. 

Mr. J. W. Summers, 

322 W. 14th St., New York City, N. Y. 
Dear Sir: 

Mr. A. W. Feilchefeld has placed his claim against you 
for $50 in my hands for collection. 

He is disposed to be very lenient with you, and has in- 
structed me to take no severe measures until milder ones 
have been tried and found unavailing. He feels, however, 
that he has already extended your credit much longer than 
would ordinarily Lj justified, and that in justice to himself 
he should take steps to secure some sort of adjustment with- 
out any further delay. 

If you will call at my office any morning I shall be glad 
to hear anything you may have to say, and I hope we can 
agree on some plan for settling this matter at once. 

May I not see you in the next day or two? 

Very truly yours, (body 134 words)* 

W. E. Asche. 



When a letter such as "W." for "West," appears between the 
house number and the number indicating the name of a street, no 
confusion is possible, and the street may be written in figures, al- 
ways with "th," "nd," or "st" immediately after the number. 

Always use a capital for "City" in writing "New York City." 
It is part of the name. 

Do not write a period and two ciphers after figures indicating 
dollars, except in contracts and special contract letters. It is use- 
lessly confusing. Advertisement writers often use the ciphers to 
make small sums look large. In contracts the ciphers are used to 
prevent the fraudulent addition of figures. 



*From this point only the words in the body of the letter are given in the count. 



162 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

35 

Mr. W. E. Asche, Attorney, 

19 Broadway, New York City, N. Y. 
Dear Sir: 

I have received your letter in regard to the claim of Mr. 
A. W. Feilehefeld for $50. I am sorry to say that I am ut- 
terly unable at the present time to pay this claim. I hope 
to see daylight again within a few weeks, and just as soon 
as it is within my power to do anything toward settling this 
debt, I shall certainly do what I can. 

Eegretting that I cannot give you a more satisfactory 
answer at this time, I am 

Very truly yours, (88 words) 

J. W. Summers. 



36 
Mr. J. W. Summers, 

322 W. 14th St., New York City, N. Y. 
Dear Sir: 

Your letter of the 10th is not at all satisfactory. You can 
certainly pay something, if only f 5, and set a definite time 
when you will pay another like amount. 

I should be very sorry indeed to have to sue you, and 
add to your present indebtedness the court costs. Will you 
not favor me by calling at my office to-morrow morning at 
9 o'clock? 

Yours truly, (69 words) 

W. E. Asche/ 



HOW MONEY IS COLLECTED 163 

37 
Mr. W. E. Asche, 

19 Broadway, New York City, N. Y. 

Dear Sir : 

In accordance with your suggestion I am sending you |5 
on account. I will undertake to make additional remit- 
tances of $5 on the first day of each month. This is the 
very best that I can see my way to promising at the present 
time, and I hope you will accept this offer. If a little later 
I can see my way clear to doing better than this, I shall 
be glad to do all I can. 

Yours truly, (79 words) 

J. W. Summers. 

38 
Mr. J. W. Summers, 

322 W. 14th St., New York City, N. Y. 
Dear Sir: 

Thank you for remittance of |5 to apply on account of 
claim of A. W. Feilchefeld for |50. I also note that you 
agree to pay f 5 on the first day of each month till the claim 
is settled. 

I cannot say that this w 7 ill be satisfactory to Mr. Feilche- 
feld, but I shall convey your offer to him and shall advise 
him to wait five or six weeks before taking any further steps. 
I hope by that time that you can make a better proposition. 

Yours truly, (88 words) 

W. E. Asche. 



CHAPTER X 

Letters to Ladies 

In writing to ladies a more formal courtesy is required 
than in writing to men, and a more elaborate politeness. 

If the writer does not know the lady addressed, he should 
invariably begin -"Dear Madam." 

If he is acquainted with her he will" begin "Dear Mrs. 
Blank" or "My dear Mrs. Blank." 

It must be remembered that ladies are chiefly familiar 
with the social forms in letter writing, and business letters 
to them should tend toward the social style rather than 
toward the terse brevity which men like best 



39 

(Letter-head) Dec. 20, 1919. 
Mrs. Wm. R. Jones, 

4537 Grand Boul., Chicago, 111. 
Dear Madam : 

Mr. Simpson wishes me to say that he is very sorry in- 
deed that he was not in his office when you called yesterday. 
He was away all the forenoon, and did not know until this 
morning that you had called. 

If there is any way in which he can serve you it will give 
him great pleasure to do so. 

Respectfully yours, (61 words) 

Agnes Bartlett, Sec. 

164 



LETTERS TO LADIES 165 

40 

(Letter-head) Jan. 3, 1919. 
Miss Sarah Jackson, 

439 Columbus Ave., Boston, Mass. 
Dear Madam : 

I explained your wishes to Mr. Simpson when he returned 
to the office, and he has requested me to say that he is very 
sorry indeed, but he is quite unable to get passes even for 
himself. He regrets exceedingly that he cannot be of service 
to you. 

Eespectfully yours, (52 words) 

Agnes Bartlett, Sec. 



41 

(Letter-head) May 31, 1919. 
Miss Jane I. Volwart, 

37 Plymouth Place, Detroit, Mich. 
Dear Madam : 

I have carefully considered your application for a position 
in my office, and have tried to make a place for you, as 1 
should be very glad indeed if I might oblige Mrs. Peterson, 
for whom I have the highest consideration. At this season of 
the year, however, business is somewhat slack, and we have 
all the help we can possibly make use of for some months 
to come. 

I have your address, and if anything should open up, it 
will give me great pleasure to be able to write to you. 

With sincere regrets, 

Most cordially yours, (100 words) 

William P. Jackson. 



166 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

42 

(Letter-head) Mar. 21, 1919. 
Dear Miss Kennedy: 

I regret to say that I am obliged to return your little 
sketch. It has considerable merit, but it is not precisely 
adapted to the needs of our business, and I do not think I 
should be justified in using it. Possibly you might find some 
other advertising manager to whose needs it would be better 
suited. 

Thanking you for your consideration in submitting it, and 
once more expressing my keen regret, I am 

Very truly yours, (85 words) 

Barclay Dutton, 
Adv. Manager. 
Miss Agnes Kennedy, 

15 Park Eow, Xew York City. 

The formal and old-fashioned manner of closing this letter is 
justified by the man's deference for the lady. 

"Adv." is a better abbreviation for advertisement than "ad.," 
but it is better to avoid abbreviations. 

43 

(Letter-head) Jan. 31, 1919. 
My dear Mrs. Dudley: 

I was informed this afternoon that you wished to get a 
sideboard to match your new dining-room woodwork. I trust 
you will permit me to be of service to you in this matter, 
and I shall be very glad indeed if I can assist you. 

The best way is to have the sideboard made to order to 
match a sample of the wood. If you will have a small piece 
of the wood prepared to match the color of the woodwork 
exactly, I will order the sideboard made by a manufacturer 



LETTERS TO LADIES 167 

with whom I am acquainted, and it will cost you no more 
than a similar sideboard taken out of stock. 

When you have chosen the style you wish, let me know, 
and I will attend to the matter at once. 

Sincerely yours, (138 words) 

G. Augustus Belmonte. 
Mrs. S. A. Dudley, 
403 Park Ave., New York City. 



CHAPTER XI 

Professional Letters 

In letters written by lawyers, doctors, and other pro- 
fessional men, the social style is usually more suitable than 
a strictly business style. 

Letters to those with whom the writer is personally ac- 
quainted should never begin "Dear Sir" or "Dear Madam." 
but usually "My dear Mr. Buck" or "Dear Mrs. Dudley." 
The word "My" seems to indicate, not greater intimacy, but 
a desire to show greater cordiality. Jt is a little more effu- 
sive than "Dear So-and-So" without "My." When the letter 
begins with the name of the person addressed, the full name 
and address should be placed at the end. In dictating it is 
convenient to give the name and address first ; but the sten- 
ographer may write it at the head of the letter. 

44 

(Letter-head) Oct. 4, 1919. 
Dear Mr. Hoadley : 

Your case comes up for trial a week from today. I think 
we are fully prepared, but I should like to see you the day 
before and go briefly over the points we are going to make. 
I will telephone you the day before, and we can arrange a 
meeting either at your office or at mine. Should anything 
prevent your being on hand, be sure to let me know. 

Very truly yours, (76 words) 

Mr. H. M. Hoadley, 

4546 Drexel Ave., Chicago. 
Notice that in writing a business letter to a friend, the usual 

168 



PROFESSIONAL LETTERS 169 

closing form is retained, the same as in any business letter, though 
plain "Yours truly" appears rather too cold. "Sincerely yours" and 
"Cordially yours" are better reserved, the first for letters of friend- 
ship purely, the latter for cases in which effusiveness to strangers 
is the purpose. "Cordially yours" seems too patronizing to be used 
in writing to a friend or associate. 

45 

(Date line.) 

My dear Mrs. Paisley : 

I have been notified that the taxes on your lot at Austin 
have not been paid and the lot will be sold for taxes next 
week. I presume that for some reason the tax notices have 
not reached you and that you have overlooked the matter. 
If you wish I will send my check for the amount — now 
f 10.65, including some fines and fees — and you may remit 
to me at your convenience. 

Please let me hear from you as soon as possible, as the 
time is short. 

Very truly yours, (96 w T ords) 

Mrs. Hiram M. Paisley, 

Vincennes, Ind. 

46 

(Date line.) 

My dear Frank : 

I have just heard of a position with Boardman & Laidley, 
Board of Trade Building, which I think you can fill and 
which will be worth your effort to get. You may present 
this letter to Mr. Laidley by way of introduction, and tell 
him I shall consider any favor he may extend to you as 
creating an obligation on my part. 

With best wishes, 

Sincerely yours, (72 words) 

Mr. Frank P. Lawson, 

7 Caxtpn Bldg., Chicago. 



170 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

47 

(Letter-head) July 11, 1919. 
My dear Henry : 

This will present to you a young friend of our family, 
Miss Myrtle Reed. I understand she is an accomplished 
stenographer and typist. We all like her very much per- 
sonally, and I feel quite sure she will prove faithful and 
trustworthy. 

She would like to get a congenial position, and if you can 
help her in any way to a position either in your own office 
or in that of some friend of yours, you will confer a favor on 
me as well as on her. 

As ever, Your friend, (93 words) 

John H. Higgins. 
Mr. Henry Jolams, 

54 Broadway, New York City. 

A letter like this, which is to be shown to a business man, must 
have just the right amount of familiarity and formality — not too 
much of either. 

48 
(Letter-head) July 12, 1919. 
My dear John : 

I will do what I can for your friend, Miss Myrtle Reed, 
who called today and presented your note. I think perhaps 
I can help her. She is an attractive-looking girl, and if she 
can work well I am sure we shall all be pleased with her. 
We are putting on an extra stenographer next week, and 1 
will give her a trial. 
With best wishes, 

Sincerely yours, (71 words) 



Henry Jolams. 



Mr. John H. Higgins, 

79 West 92nd St., New York City. 



PROFESSIONAL LETTERS 171 

Notice the hyphen in "attractive-looking." When an adjective 
rather than an adverb precedes a participle, the hyphen should 
always be used. We write "well known" as two words, because 
"well" is an adverb naturally modifying the participle; but "hard- 
headed" with a hyphen, since to omit it would leave an adjective 
incorrectly placed before a participle. 



49 

45 Park Ave., New York City, 
July 14, 1919. 
Dear Mr. Higgins: 

I want to thank you once more for your kind note of in- 
troduction to Mr. Jolams. I presented it, and he received 
me very kindly. He says his firm is putting on an extra 
stenographer next Monday, and he will give me a trial. I 
certainly hope I shall not disgrace you. In any case, I am 
deeply grateful for your kindness. 

Sincerely yours, (67 words) 



Myrtle Eeed. 



Mr. John H. Higgins, 

79 West 92nd St., New York City. 



When a young girl or married woman writes to a person who 
knows her very well, the Miss or Mrs. in parentheses is not re- 
quired. Use that only in writing to strangers who may not know 
whether the writer is married or single, for the only object is to 
give information and save embarrassment. 

50 

79 West 92nd St., New York City, 
January 3, 1920. 
My dear Miss Reed : 

I met a friend last night who told me he was looking for a 
stenographer. He is a man I know is in the habit of paying 



172 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

a great deal more than you are probably now getting, and it 
occurred to me that you might like to apply for the position. 
I inclose a note of introduction, and hope it will be of use 
to you. 

Sincerely yours, (72 words) 

John H. Higgins. 
Miss Myrtle Reed, 
45 Park Ave., New York City, 

51 
45 Park Ave., New York City, 
January 7, 1920. 
Dear Mr. Higgins. 

It was exceedingly kind of you to remember me, and you 
will be glad to know that your letter of introduction to Mr. 
Farnum has helped me to a position paying half as much 
again as I was getting with Mr. Jolams. I was sorry to 
leave him, for he was very kind to me, and I found his work 
pleasant. The additional salary, if I can manage to please 
Mr. Farnum, will be very welcome to my mother and me, 
however. 

My mother also wishes me to express her appreciation of 
your kindness, and sends her regards to your wife. 

Sincerely yours, (106 words) 

Myrtle Reed. 
Mr. John H. Higgins, 

79 West 92nd St., New York City. 

If this young lady had written "to Mother and me," "Mother" 
would have become a name, and so should be capitalized; but "to 
my mother and me" leaves "mother" a common noun, which 
should be written with a small letter. In a salutation we write 
"Father," "Mother," "Brother," "Sister," etc., with a capital letter 
whether we use "My dear," or simply "Dear." Always write "dear" 
with a small letter after "My." 



PROFESSIONAL LETTERS 173 

52 

Lake Shore Drive, Chicago, 
June 29, 1919. 
Mrs. David G. MeCormick, 

Lake Forest, 111. 
Dear Madam : 

Mrs. Farwell has been unexpectedly called to New York 
to be with her sister, who is ill at St. Luke's Hospital. She 
will, therefore, be unable to attend the meeting of the direc- 
tors of the Woman's Guild next Saturday. She has written 
out her report as chairman of the finance committee, how- 
ever, and wishes me to ask you if you will present it to the 
directors for her. 

I am copying it on the typewriter, and hope to have it 
ready by Thursday. If you will let me know in the meantime 
whether you will be at the meeting or not, and can present 
the report for Mrs. Farwell, I will mail it to you when I 
have it ready. 

I know Mrs. Farwell will be very grateful to you if you 
can do this for her. 

Hoping to hear from you soon in regard to the matter, 
I am 

Eespectfully yours, (154 words) 

Myra Bosworth, Secretary. 

Notice that "Hospital" is capitalized when it is part of a 
name, just as "Hotel" is. 

While in a strictly business letter from a man, the abbreviation 
"Sec." for "Secretary" would be allowable, in a social letter of 
this kind it is usual to spell out all words. 

In a case like this, a young lady who signs her name as "Secre- 
tary" would not place "(Miss)" before her name lest it seem pre- 
sumptuous. It would be assumed that she was unmarried. 



CHAPTER XII 

How to Acquire an Easy Style in 
Letter Writing 

There is a close connection between good letter writing 
and skill in conversation. The difference lies in the fact that 
the good letter writer takes part in a condensed, imaginary 
conversation, while the real conversationist must usually 
have the stimulus of the occasion and interesting people. 

But the way to become a good letter writer is to practice 
imaginary conversation. The person with an imagination 
may be timid and shrinking, and so in fact a very poor con- 
versationist. For that reason — that is, from lack of prac- 
tice — he may lack ease and freedom of expression. But he 
can easily make up for this by practicing imaginary conver- 
sations, where there will be nothing to make him afraid. 
And that is the true way to acquire an easy style in letter 
writing — carry on imaginary conversations an hour every 
evening. 

53 
58 Royal St., Boston, May 19, 1919. 
My dear Sherman: 

My wife and I are going South for a month on May 25, 
and we have thought possibly you would like to take our 
house while we are gone. You will be expected to act pre- 
cisely as if you were in your own home, and we shall feel at 
ease if we can know that some responsible person is taking 
care of the place. You see, therefore, that you will be con- 
ferring a great favor on us if you can arrange to move over. 

174 



AN EASY STYLE IN LETTER WRITING . 175 

Will you let me know by day after tomorrow if this 
arrangement will be agreeable to you? 
Kind remembrances to the family. 

Yours sincerely, (120 words) 

Joseph Markham. 
Mr. Alec Sherman, 
Thorndike Hotel, Boston. 

54 
Thorndike Hotel, May 20, 1919. 
My dear Markham : 

It was certainly very kind of you to think of us in connec- 
tion with the occupation of your house during your absence. 
If it will be any accommodation to you, it will certainly give 
us pleasure to go out to Allston for a month, and we shall 
look on it as a special privilege. 

Mrs. Sherman and I will go out day after tomorrow even- 
ing and look the ground over. Mrs. Sherman says she hopes 
Mrs. Markham will put away all her best china and valuable 
bric-a-brac, for she feels very nervous about touching other 
people's precious belongings. 

By the way, will your servant remain with us? Or must 
we look elsewhere for help ? 

Until we meet, 

Your friend, (112 words) 

Alec Sherman. 
Mr. Joseph Markham, 

58 Royal St., Boston. 

55 

700 Beacon St., Boston, Sept. 5, 1919. 
My dear Mrs. Paxton : 

My wife has left at my office a bundle of books which 
she intends for the Hospital Club. They have been lying 



176 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

here ever since she went away in August, and I owe the Club 
a profound apology for my negligence in not attending to 
the matter sooner. I would send them to you at once now 
if I knew you were in town. If you are not in town, I should 
be glad if you would tell me what to do. Please direct me, 
and believe me 

Faithfully yours, (94 words) 

Mrs. Henry Paxton, Silas Oummings. 

Brookline Village. 

56 
Henniker, N. H., Aug. 15, 1919. 
Dear Mr. Morrill : 

I have not received my rent for the house in town for 
August yet. It was due Aug. 1. I wish you would call up 
Mr. Stillings on the telephone and tell him it would be a 
great convenience to me if he could send me a check at once. 
You know the interest on the mortgage is due September 1, 
and I shall not have enough money to pay it unless I get a 
check from Mr. Stillings for two months. 

Have you succeeded in doing anything with our case 
against the Baxter Company? Their building has deprived 
me of half the income from the Newton Street house. I sup- 
pose we must take what we can get from them; but I want 
the matter pushed to some sort of conclusion as quickly as 
possible. 

I pity you in town these hot August days. But if you were 
not there I do not know what I should do. 

Sincerely yours, (163 words) 

Martha V. Cooke. 
Mr. James Morrill, 
Attorney-at-law, 

40 Boylston St., Boston. 



AN EASY STYLE IN LETTER WRITING 177 

57 

Colorado Springs, Colo., 
Oct. 17, 1919. 
Dear Mr. Collins : 

I want to ask you a favor. Of course, I assume you will 
be eager to oblige me, but for all that I assure you in advance 
that I am properly grateful. 

I have just heard that my friend Frances Runlett is to 
be married the first of next month to a Mr. Henry Sloeuni of 
San Francisco. I have never seen him, but I am told he is 
handsome, generous, and rich. I wish I knew more about 
his position. 

Now, I know that it would give Frances pleasure if the 
coming event were announced in the Chicago papers. I con- 
fess I don't know how these things are managed, but I sup- 
pose you give the item to the society editors. You will know 
just what to do and how to do it. 

Once more let me thank you for attending to the matter. 
Sincerely yours, (147 words) 

Florence Westcott. 
Mr. Charles X. Collins, 

Care the Tribune, Chicago. 

A tone of pleasant banter is considered appropriate when a 
young lady writes to a young man she knows well. The person who 
uses this manner should be sure he or she is master of it. 

When "now" is used as a sort of expletive, it is nearly always 
set off by a comma; but if it is used to mean "at this time, ,, it 
should not be set off by a comma. 

Many people suppose that the comma is used to take the place 
of an omitted "and" in such groups of words as "handsome, gen- 
erous, and rich," and therefore no comma is required before "and." 
There is good authority for omitting the comma, but I consider it 
better usage to retain it. Omission of the comma in such groups 
as "He was rich and handsome, well-bred and gentle, and in every 



178 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

way a man to be admired," would run the last two groups of words 
together in confusion, since "well-bred and gentle" needs to be 
kept as a group by itself, and "and" in this group has a very dif- 
ferent effect from "and" following it. But either usage has ample 
authority. 

58 

665 Fifth Ave., Cleveland, Ohio. 
Dec. 18, 1919. 
Dear Mr. Carter : 

I want you to pick out a few books for me for Christinas 
presents. I have been trying to get to the store and pick 
them out myself, but I find I cannot do so. I know you have 
very good taste, so I am going to depend on you, and beg that 
you will attend to the matter with your usual faithfulness 
and care. 

I want a pretty edition of the Blessed Damosel, not over 
$2, for a young lady friend. For my husband I w 7 ant a good 
library edition of Bryce's American Commonwealth. I sup- 
pose you have some new picture books for children this year. 
Don't give me anything silly or cheap-looking. I w T ant a 
good-sized book, not to cost over f 2, for a little boy of ten. 
Then I want a large picture book w T orth about 50 cents for a 
small boy of three. Send me also a nice story book for a girl 
of twelve — something like Little Women, only new. 

If you can pick these books out tomorrow 7 and have them 
sent up to me, I shall be very grateful. 

Faithfully yours, (189 words) 

(Mrs.) Charles Dexter. 
Mr. Allen Carter, 

Care Burrows Bros., Cleveland. 

The titles of the books in this letter are common, and need not 
be inclosed in quotation marks or underscored. 



AN EASY STYLE IN LETTER WRITING 179 

Notice the hyphens in "cheap-looking" and "good-sized" (ad- 
jectives combined with participles). Observe also the dash before 
"something," indicating an abrupt transition. 

59 

665 Fifth Ave., Cleveland, Ohio. 
Dec. 23, 1919. 
Dear Mr. Carter: 

Thank you ever so much for your kindness in attending to 
the books for me. They came yesterday, and I am very much 
pleased with all your selections, especially with the copy of 
the Blessed Damosel. That certainly is a beautiful book. 
Mr. Dexter will send a check to cover the bill. 

Yours faithfully, (57 words) 

(Mrs.) Charles Dexter. 
Mr. Allen Carter, 

Care Burrows Bros., Cleveland. 



CHAPTER XIII 

Two Kinds of Letters — Buying and Selling 

In business there are two things — buying and selling. 
Successful buying consists in knowing what to buy, and the 
only important thing in buying is to specify everything you 
want and make it perfectly clear just how you want it. 

Buying letters should be just as brief as possible — they 
can't be too brief in the mere matter of words if they cover 
clearly every essential point. 

Selling letters, on the other hand, must be as long as the 
prospective customer will' read — and must display all the fine 
art and highest skill in letter writing. It is in these letters 
that the fine art of business English is displayed and in 
which the true art of advertising must be constantly exer- 
cised. 

Note. Observe that f. o. b. means ''free on board cars" (in the 
town mentioned, usually the place from which shipment is made), 
and c. i. f. means "cost, insurance, and freight," or that bill in- 
cludes safe delivery to the town of the buyer. F. o. b. the customer's 
town amounts to the same thing, and nowadays "c. i. f." is seldom 
used. 

Buying Letters 
60 

(Letter-head) July 10, 1919. 
The Jones Belting Company, 

Ashland, Pa. 
Gentlemen : 

We are inclosing our order No. 31067 for one 4-in. leather 
belt, 12 feet in length, your No. 633, to be shipped by you 

180 



TWO KINDS OF LETTERS 181 

direct to our customer, Mr. J. M. Fifield, Wichita, Kans., by 
express prepaid. Please see that this belt is carefully packed 
and shipped promptly. On receipt of this order, please notify 
us when you expect to make shipment, and as soon as ship- 
ment is made notify customer when he may look for delivery 
and by what line. 

Your prompt and faithful attention to this order will be 
appreciated. Very truly yours, (95 words) 

Montgomery Ward & Co. 
James Hall, Mgr. Machinery Dept. 



In a name like this always spell out the word "Company"; do 
not write "Co." 

We always capitalize "No." before figures. Notice the hyphen 
in "4-in." 

Letters to business houses are usually much more condensed 
and abrupt than letters to retail customers, to whom extra polite- 
ness is considered necessary in order to promote sales. 

"Mgr." for "manager" is more of a contraction than an abbre- 
viation proper, but it is always written with a period as an abbre- 
viation instead of with apostrophes (M'g'r), because the period is 
easier to write, and the word occurs so often. "Bids." for "building" 
is also nearly universal. 



61 

(Letter-head) July 18, 1919. 
The Jones Belting Company, 

Ashland, Pa. 
Gentlemen : 

On July 10 we sent you our order No. 31067 for one 4-in. 
leather belt 12 ft. in length, your No. 635, to be shipped direct 
prepaid. We asked you to notify us on receipt of this order 
when you would make shipment, which we were anxious to 



182 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

have made as promptly as possible. We have as yet heard 
nothing from you. 

Will you please acknowledge this order at once, and state 
when shipment will be made, if indeed you have not already 
made it? 

Yours truly, (98 words) 

Montgomery Ward & Co. 
James Hall, Mgr. Machinery Dept. 

Selling Letters — With the Inquiries They Answer 

62 

Janesville, Ind., Mar. 3, 1919. 
The Washington Shirt Company, 

Chicago, 111. 
Gentlemen : 

I understand you sell men's furnishings by mail. Have 
you anything that will show fully what you offer? I wish to 
buy, but would like full information in regard to what I pur- 
chase, and also would like to know if I may return anything 
I don't like. 
An early reply will oblige 

Yours truly, (56 words) 

Henry Farley. 

63 

(Letter-head) Mar. 4, 1919. 
Mr. Henry Farley, 

Janesville, Ind. 
Dear Sir: 

In compliance, with your request of yesterday we hasten 
to send you our complete catalogue, in which you will find a 
detailed description of our entire line of goods. 



TWO KINDS OP LETTERS 183 

We make it a rule to protect our customers in every pos- 
sible way. If goods are not satisfactory, they may be re- 
turned at our expense. We also ship C. O. D. ? with privilege 
of examination, but ask the customer to send at least $1 with 
his order, as a guaranty of good faith and an indication that 
he means business. 

We believe that we have the finest goods in our particular 
line to be found in Chicago, or anywhere else. You will find 
us prompt and courteous, and anxious to do anything we can 
to serve you. Our salesmen and correspondents are at your 
disposal, and we shall be glad to give you fuller information 
at any time if you let us know just what you are looking for. 

Trusting we may hear from you again at an early date, 
and have the honor of filling your orders, we are 

Most cordially yours, (182 words) 

The Washington Shirt Company. 

Notice that it takes two or more articles of a kind to make a 
"line." Some people will speak of a single insurance policy as a 
"line of insurance." This is absurd. 

Since "we are cordially yours" reads right along as a connected 
sentence, no comma is required after "we are." 

64 

(Letter-head) Mar. 16, 1919. 
Mr. Henry Farley, 

Janesville, Ind. 
Dear Sir: 

About two weeks ago we had an inquiry from you in re- 
gard to our line of goods, and wrote you immediately, send- 
ing you our catalogue. We should be glad to know if the 
catalogue reached you promptly. If it did not come to hand, 
please let us know and we will send another. 
We are confident that we have the best goods in our line 



184 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

to be found in the city of Chicago, or in any other city, and 
at reasonable prices. You will not find anywhere a house 
that will extend you more courtesies, or deal by you more 
fairly, nor will you anywhere get prompter service. We pride 
ourselves on the promptness with which we fill all orders. 
Many of them are filled the very day they are received. 

May we not hear from you shortly and know in what way 
we may serve you ? 

Yours trul} 7 , (149 words) 

The Washington Shirt Company. 



Always write "anywhere/' "everywhere, " "anything," "every- 
thing," etc., as single solid words without division of any kind. 
Careful writers divide "every one," "any one," making two words. 



65 

Janesville, Ind., Mar. 20, 1919. 
The Washington Shirt Company, 

Chicago, 111. 
Gentlemen : 

I want a pretty pink and blue necktie for about 50 cents. 
I do not care to go higher. I want one that will wear well 
and look rich. What would you recommend? I also want 
some shirts and collars. Can you recommend your 50-cent 
unlaundered shirts for wear? Do you think your 12^-cent 
collars are as good as the E. & W. 25-cent ones? 

As soon as I hear from you I will send you an order. 
Yours truly, (78 words) 

Henry Farley. 

Always write 50c, 75c, etc., rather ihan $.50, or $0.75. There is 
less danger of confusion. 



TWO KINDS OF LETTERS 185 



Mr. Henry Farley, 



66 
(Letter-head) Mar. 21, 1919. 



Janesville, Ind. 



Dear Sir: 

We think we have such a tie as you describe in yours of 
yesterday, and if you will send us an order, with as full a 
description as possible of what you want, we will exercise 
our best judgment, and believe we can send you something 
pretty. In any case, you know, it may be returned if you 
do not like it and we will make another selection or refund 
your money. 

The bosoms of our 50-cent unlaundered shirts are rather 
small, and, of course, the material is not of the finest. We 
have something at 65 cents, which you will find described 
under Xo. 4786, on page 32 of the catalogue, which we can 
recommend in every possible way, and we believe that you 
will find this a better bargain than the cheaper shirts, though 
they are as good for the money as you will find anywhere, 
and, if anything, a little better. 

We do not hesitate a moment in recommending our 12^- 
cent collars, in quarter sizes. We can fit you perfectly, and 
you will not be able to tell the difference between these and 
collars costing double. Remember that you get two of these 
for one of the others. 

Hoping to receive your order at an early date, we are 
Very truly yours, (217 words) 

The Washington Shirt Company. 

Account for the commas in the first sentence. Why no comma 
before "and we will" in the second sentence when the subject 
changes? 



186 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

67 
Janesville, Ind., Mar. 30, 1919. 
The Washington Shirt Company, 

Chicago, 111. 
Gentlemen : 

Please send me by express, C. O. D., your neatest pink and 
blue 50-eent necktie, two 65-cent unlaundered shirts, and half 
a dozen of your 12^-cent collars. I inclose fl. 

Yours truly, (31 words) 

Henry Farley. 



CHAPTER XIV 

When to Write a Long Letter and When 
to Write a Short Letter 

If you are going to write to a customer in a simple and 
conversational style, you must form the habit of imagining 
that the man is sitting in a chair beside your desk as you 
write. 

But you must bear in mind another thing, and that is that 
he will read your letter a thousand miles away when he is in 
a hurry and when he can give no more than two or three 
minutes to what you have to say. When you write, think 
of him as sitting beside you. When you are planning your 
letter, think of him as he really is in his home or business 
office. 

Write a long letter to Write a short letter to 

A person of leisure A busy business man 

A woman not in business An indifferent man on whom 

A customer who has asked you want to make a sharp im- 

you a question pression 

A customer who is angry and A person who has written you 

needs quieting down, and will be about a trivial matter for which 

made only more angry if you he cares little 

seem to slight him A man who wants only a rec- 

A man who is interested, but ord of a piece of information 

must be convinced before he will A person who needs only the 

buy your goods slightest reminder of something 

he has forgotten or overlooked 

Never write a longer letter than you have good reason to 
believe will be read all through. A busy business man will 
never wade through a long explanation. 

187 



188 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

68 

(Letter-head) Mar. 31, 1919. 
Mr. Henry Farley, 

Janesville, Ind. 
Dear Sir: 

Thank you for your order of yesterday, with remittance 
of $1. Unfortunately you omitted to give the size of shirts 
and collars. We would suggest that you send not only the 
neck measurement, but the length of sleeve desired. In 
measuring the sleeve, measure from the seam on the tip of 
the shoulder to the wrist. 

As soon as we know the sizes desired we will give your 
order prompt attention, and you will get the goods within a 
day or two. 
Once more thanking you, we are 

Yours truly, (91 words) 

The Washington Shirt Company. 



69 

Janesville, Ind., April 3, 1919. 
The Washington Shirt Company, 

Chicago, 111. 
Gentlemen : 

My neck measure is 10 inches, and sleeve 33. Kindly 
send the goods as soon as possible. 

Yours truly, (20 words) 

Henry Farley. 

Numbers indicating measurements or suggesting statistics 
should always be given in figures, never in written words, 



WHEN TO WRITE LONG OR SHORT LETTERS 189 

70 

Janesville, Ind., April 5, 1919. 
The Washington Shirt Company, 

Chicago, 111. 
Gentlemen : 

I expected to receive, today at the latest, the goods ordered 
of you Mar. 30, but they have not yet reached the express 
office. Let me know by return mail when I shall get them. 

Yours truly, (38 words) 

Henry Farley. 



71 

(Letter-head) April 6, 1919. 
Mr. Henry Farley, 

Janesville, Ind. 
Dear Sir: 

The goods ordered by you March 30, you will remember, 
we were unable to ship until we had received the sizes given 
in yours of April 3. It takes about a day for us to select the 
goods and fill out invoices. Shipment was made yesterday, 
and notification card mailed you. No doubt you have re- 
ceived the goods before this. 

We hope you will be pleased with what we have sent you, 
and that we may be favored with additional orders from you 
in the future. 

Yours truly, (90 words) 

The Washington Shirt Company. 



190 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

72 
Janesville, Ind., April 6, 1919. 
The Washington Shirt Company, 

Chicago, 111. 
Gentlemen : 

The goods I ordered from you came this evening. The 
shirts and collars are all right, but I do not like the necktie 
at all. I wanted something quiet and sober, and you have 
sent me a flaring, high-colored thing. I send it back by mail, 
and will ask you to send me another, such as I want. 

Yours truly, (G2 words) 

Henry Farley. 
We may write "highly colored" (participle and adverb) or 
"high-colored" (compound word). 

73 

Mr. Henry Farley, (Letter-head ) April 7, 1919. 

Janesville, Ind. 
Dear Sir: 

We are very sorry to see by your favor of the 6th that the 
necktie we chose did not please you. We are very glad you 
acted promptly and returned it, and no doubt we shall re- 
ceive it today or tomorrow. Just as soon as it comes to 
hand we will pick out another that we hope will please you 
better, and send it at the earliest possible moment. 

We are always anxious to please our customers, and you 
will find us ready at all times to make every possible effort 
to meet your wishes. 

Trusting we shall be more fortunate this time in our selec- 
tion of a necktie, we are 

Very truly yours, (116 words) 

The Washington Shirt Company. 
However irritating a customer's letter may be, a business letter 
writer should always preserve the same unvarying air of extreme 
politeness. 



WHEN TO WRITE LONG OR SHORT LETTERS 191 

74 

Janesville, Ind., April 10, 1919. 
The Washington Shirt Company, 

Chicago, 111. 
Gentlemen : 

A day or two ago I received your letter dated April 7, in 
which you said you would send me another necktie at once 
for the one I returned to you. I have not yet received it, 
and wish you would trace it. 

Yours truly, (46 words) 

Henry Farley. 



75 

(Letter-head) April 11, 1919. 
Mr. Henry Farley, 

Janesville, Ind. 
Dear Sir: 

We regret to know by your letter of the 10th that the 
second necktie sent you had not come to hand. It was 
placed in the mails on April 8, but Uncle Sam is often a little 
slow with bundles of merchandise, and it is our experience 
that goods lie two or three days in the postoffice here before 
they go out. 

If you do not receive the necktie by the 14th, let us hear 
from you again, and we will do what w T e can to trace it. 

Hoping, however, that there will be no more delay, and 
that the article when received will prove satisfactory, we are 
Very truly yours, (113 words) 

The Washington Shirt Company. 



192 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

76 

(Letter-head) July 25, 1919. 
Mr. Henry Farley, 

Janesville, Ind. 
Dear Sir: 

Some time ago we received a small order from you, which 
we hope we filled to your satisfaction. 

We are mailing to you today our new fall catalogue, and 
ask you to look it over carefully, for we believe we have as 
fine a line of goods as you will get anywhere, and at most 
reasonable prices. 

You will find us exceptionally prompt, and always cour- 
teous. Anything you do not like may be returned at our ex- 
pense, and we will send you something else in its place, or 
refund your money. So you see that you take no risk what- 
ever in shopping by mail. 

May we not hear from you again soon? 

Cordially yours, (115 words) 

The Washington Shirt Company. 



CHAPTER XV 

Answering Inquiries 

Before answering any letter be sure that you understand 
fully all about the subject concerning which you are going to 
write. If you do not understand clearly every phase of it, 
make inquiries until you understand. 

When you understand the matter yourself, explain every- 
thing clearly point by point to the customer. 

Think of the customer as a little child, and tell him all 
about first this point, and then the next point, and then the 
next point. Consider carefully just what he knows, and just 
what he would like to find out. Try to put yourself in his 
place. 

Letters answering inquiries should usually be quite long, 
if there are many details to explain. 



77 

A Poor Answer to a Letter Ordering Goods 

(See Letter 25, Chapter VII.) 

Miss (Mrs.?) Martha Martin, (Letter-head and date.) 

Shelby viile, Ind. (?)* 
Dear Miss 2 or Madam : 

We hereby 3 acknowledge receipt of your esteemed 4 order 
of the 8th inst., which has had our prompt attention. 5 We 
are unable to ship the goods, however, since you do not state 
what quality and kinds of goods you wish, do not state how 
you wish the goods shipped, and make no inclosure of funds. 

193 



194 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

We do not ship C. O. D. unless the order is accompanied by 
sufficient money to cover the cost of transportation. 7 

If you will supply us with the necessary information as to 
quality and kind of goods desired, and will remit a sufficient 
amount at least to cover transportation, w r e will give your 
order immediate attention. 

Yours truly, 

Siegel, Cooper & Co 

1. Do not insult a customer even by the hinted criticism of 
a question mark. 

2. "Miss" should never be used in opening a letter. 

3. Such words as "hereby/' "herewith, " etc., are usually un- 
necessary in a letter, and help to give it that forbidding formality 
which repels and deadens interest. 

4. Useless jargon, quite meaningless. 

5. How many business letters contain statements of this kind, 
which really mean nothing, even if they are not untrue! 

6. The writer evidently did not know what she wanted, and 
detailed information should have been supplied. 

7. Too much bluntness, and too many commercial words. 



The Right Answer to This Letter 

Martha Martin, (Letter-head and date.) 

Shelbyviile, Ind. 
Dear Madam : 

We have received your order of the 8th ? but are unable to 
fill it until we find out a little more exactly what you want. 
Do you wish Band, McNally & Co.'s Popular Atlas of the 
World, price $4? We sell a great many of these. 

What price do you wish to pay for handkerchiefs, and 
do you wish white or colored, ladies' or gentlemen's size? 

What brand of soap do you prefer, and what price would 
you care to pay? 



ANSWERING INQUIRIES 195 

We have ladies' fancy writing paper, put up 24 sheets 
and 24 envelopes in a box, at 48c to 85c a box; also very 
good notepaper by the pound at 30c, envelopes to match 18c 
a package. 

It will be cheaper for you to send the necessary amount 
of money in advance, and let us ship to you by express, you 
paying the express charges when you receive the goods. Of 
course we will let you exchange or return any goods you do 
not like. If you prefer, you may send $1, and we will ship 
by express and let the express company collect the rest. 

As soon as we hear from you, we will give your order 
prompt attention. 

Very truly yours, 

Siegel, Cooper & Co. 

Notice — 

1. That as "Martha Martin" did not write "Miss" or "Mrs." 
before her name, no title can safely be used; 

2. That in selling by mail you must give the smallest order 
as much attention as the largest. The small buyer may become the 
big buyer; and besides, the greatest successes have been based on 
uniform courtesy to all; 

3. That the ignorant customer wants suggestion and help — 
which should be sympathetic, and not officiously obtrusive; 

4. That every item spoken of should have a paragraph to it- 
self, and the facts should be stated in perfectly simple language, 
without any trade terms; 

5. That while a letter ordering goods may be as short as you 
can make it, a letter explaining difficulties must be sufficiently long 
to cover fully all the details. 

78 

A Poor Reply to a Letter of Inquiry 

(A customer writes to say, "I am thinking of buying a piano. 
I want something good and cheap. What would you advise? Have 
you silver G strings for a violin? I have a pretty good violin, but 



196 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

the G string grates somewhat, and I thought possibly a silver string 
might be better. What do you charge for Chopin's Nocturnes ?") 

Blank & Blank, Chicago, Feby. 1 3rd, 2 1919. 
Mrs. John Farwell, 
Aberdeen, Ala. 

My Dear 3 Madam. — In 4 reply to your esteemed favor, 
which seems to have no date, 5 we are sending you our com- 
plete catalogue, in which you wall find full particulars of all 
the styles of pianos, violin strings, and music w r hich we have, 
with prices attached. 6 We sincerely hope you will be able to 
make a suitable selection, and that we may be favored with 
your valued 7 order at an early date. 

Trusting this information may be entirely satisfactory, 8 
we beg to remain, 9 

Yours truly, 

Blank & Blank. 



1. When a word is condensed instead of being abbreviated, no 
period is required at the end. Use an apostrophe in place of the 
missing letters, and write "Feb'y," "Ass'n" (for "association"), etc. 
It is always better to use the regular abbreviations — "Feb.," "Jan.," 
etc. 

2. The best usage is to omit letters after the day of the month 
and write "Feb. 3, 1919," etc., especially when the year is given. 
When the day of the month only is given, as "3rd ult," the letters 
after the figure are absolutely required and cannot be omitted. 

3. When "dear" is not the first word of the salutation, it should 
never be capitalized. To address a stranger as "My dear" is a breach 
of social etiquette, justified (if at all) only when there are special 
reasons for wishing to force familiarity. 

4. A comma and a dash after the salutation are correct if you 
prefer that punctuation to a colon, but not a period and dash. "In" 
should begin a new paragraph. 

5. Almost an insult to the customer to remind him that he 
has not dated his letter. 



ANSWERING INQUIRIES 197 

6. "Attached" is used in a technical commercial sense, and 
might confuse an ignorant person. This reference to prices may 
just as well be omitted, for the customer in looking over the cata- 
logue will find the prices. 

7. "Valued" is meaningless here. 

8. A word greatly overworked, and having little or no distinct 
meaning. 

9. The comma is not required, for the sentence is "beg to re- 
main yours truly." This last sentence has been inserted merely 
to fill out and make a close. It is just as well to omit it entirely 
and write simply, "Yours truly." 

The Same Letter Rewritten 

The letter quoted above is a very stupid one, and is precisely 
the kind that is likely to drive a customer away just when rela- 
tions have been opened and an excellent sale is in prospect. Any 
salesman who met a customer in a store in this indifferent fashion 
would be discharged instanter. 

Blank & Blank, Chicago, Feb. 3, 1919. 
Mrs. John Farwell, 

Aberdeen, Ala. 
Dear Madam : 

We are much interested in your letter just received and 
are sending you our catalogue. 

About what price did you want to pay for a piano, and for 
what sized room did you want it? We have a great variety, 
and many excellent instruments at. astonishingly low prices. 
If you will kindly tell us just what you had in mind, we 
shall take great pleasure in advising you to the best of our 
ability. 

Quite possibly a silver string would improve the tone of 
your violin. We can send you one for $1. 

We inclose a little folder with prices of standard music 
which we carry. You will find Chopin's Nocturnes quoted on 



198 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

pages 3, 9, and 12. You will also find them in some of the 
general collections described on page 2. If you do not find 
just what you want, write more in detail. 

We shall look for another letter from you in a day or two, 
for we feel sure we can please you, and you can always de- 
pend on fair and courteous treatment from us. 

Very truly yours, 

Blank & Blank. 



CHAPTER XVI 

Talking in a Letter 

A business letter or advertisement differs from business 
talk in that it must cover the subject in 100 to 200 words, 
whereas in talking a salesman may use 1,500 or 2,000 words 
or more. 

A business letter must, therefore, be very clear, very terse, 
very forcible, and straight to the point. 

Use short sentences and plain words, and try to write in 
the same simple style in which you would talk. Business 
English is conversational English, only briefer and more 
careful. 

Colloquialisms and Slang 

Since business letters are written in conversational Eng- 
lish, the standard of purity is different from that which 
applies to literary English. 

Slang may be oefined as words or phrases which have a 
touch of vulgarity about them that prohibits their use in 
writing of any kind and also in refined conversation. 

Colloquialisms are homely expressions which do not shock 
the refined ear in conversation, but which are out of place in 
careful literary compositions. 

Colloquialisms may be used in letter writing if necessary 
to make the meaning clear and forceful, but slang should be 
strictly avoided. 

Examples of permitted colloquialisms : "Letters that pull," 
"a lot" for a "great many," "proposition" in the sense of 
''business undertaking," "get down to brass tacks." 

199 



200 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Examples of objectionable slang: u Bust" for "burst" or 
u break/ ? "cut it out/' "beat it," and all card-playing and 
sporting phrases, as they have an undignified suggestion of 
vulgarity. 

79 
Colloquial English 

Actual Letter Written by Well Known Advertising 

Manager 
Dear Sir: 

I am glad to indorse again Sheldon's system of letter 
writing. You ask in what ways the course is beneficial. 
It is as if a father took his son aside and put him next to the 
game. 1 Sheldon is a practical business man, and has dealt 
so long with practical men that his writings get right down 
to brass tacks. 1 If you were going to start a new salesman 
in your business you could take him aside and tell him in 
an informal way lots 1 of things you probably wouldn't write 
out. You tell him how to go easy 1 with the old man 1 there, 
and how to keep from stepping on the toes of this other 
man. You tell him some of the mistakes that have been 
made and what you learned by them. In short you give him 
standpoint. Now that is what Sheldon does more than any 
other writer I ever read — he gives you standpoint. Although 
I pass for a capable letter writer I take my hat off 1 to 
Sheldon. 

Yours truly, 



1. This letter was written to a business acquaintance and is 
expressed in exactly the language that would have been used in 
talking to him. If the letter had been addressed to some one else, 
these colloquialisms might have been entirely out of place. The 
rule is: Be natural but never vulgar. 



TALKING IN A LETTER 201 

Easy Formality 

80 

Freeport, N. Y., Mar. 30, 1919. 
Mr. John Wanamaker, 

New York City, N. Y. 
Dear Sir: 

I wish to get a dress made to order, and write to you to 
know what you can do for me. Do you send samples of 
spring dress goods? And do you have anything which shows 
styles and how to take measurements? 
An early reply will greatly 

Oblige (50 words) 

(Mrs.) Bertha M. Smith. 

Notice that "made-to-order" with hyphens is an adjective, as in 
speaking of "made-to-order garments"; but "made to order" with- 
out hyphens is a verb, as in this letter. 



81 

Mrs. Bertha M. Smith, (Letter-head) April 1, 1919. 

Freeport, N. Y. 
Dear Madam : 

In accordance with your request of March 30, we take 
pleasure in sending you our spring catalogue under separate 
cover, including a large variety of sample pieces of summer 
dress goods, rex^resenting all the latest and prettiest weaves. 
We believe that we carry the largest line of high-grade 
dress goods in this country, and the name "Wanainaker" is 



202 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

a synonym for excellence at a moderate price. If you will 
write us more in detail, we shall have the greatest pleasure 
in assisting you to make a suitable selection. 

May we not have the pleasure of hearing from you again 
in a short time? 

Yours very truly, (104 words) 

John Wanaraaker, 

By S. D. 

It is not necessary to be stiff even if you are formal in a busi- 
ness letter. In this letter and the others in this chapter colloquial- 
isms would be out of place. You cannot talk to a strange lady in 
the same free style you would to an intimate friend. 

Never say "we will have pleasure," but always "we shall have 
pleasure," "we shall be glad." 



82 
Freeport, N. Y., April 9, 1919. 
Mr. John Wanamaker, 

New York City, N. Y. 
Dear Sir: 

I have decided to have a dress made* of the goods like this 
sample, in style No. 997. I will have it full silk lined, price 
$85, exactly as described in the catalogue. I have filled out a 
measurement blank, and inclose it. 

I don't see how I can be quite sure that the dress will fit 
me unless I can have it tried on. I think I may go to New 
York the latter part of the month, and if you can have it 
ready I might try it on then. 

Very truly yours, (96 words) 

(Mrs.) Bertha M. Smith. 



TALKING IN A LETTER 203 

83 

(Letter-head) April 11, 1919. 
Mrs. Bertha M. Smith, 

Freeport, N. Y. 
Dear Madam : 

We thank you for your order of April 9 and shall hope to 
please you in every way in filling it. You will remember, 
however, that it is stated in our catalogue that at least half 
the price of a made-to-order garment must be paid in ad- 
vance. We ask this not only of you but of every one, for y ou 
can readily understand that this is the only protection we 
have. While ready-made garments may always be returned 
and money will be refunded, w r e cannot take back made-to- 
order garments or exchange them. 

We guarantee, however, that we will give you a perfect 
fit, and that you will find the workmanship and style unex- 
ceptionable in every way. If the dress is not made precisely 
as you order it, your money will be promptly refunded. You 
will see, therefore, that you too are fully protected. 

The most convenient way will be for you to send the 
entire amount in advance. If you wish, how T ever, you may 
send half, and the other half will be collected by the express 
company w^hen the goods are delivered. 

As soon as we hear from you we will begin work at once, 
and if you are to be in Xew York you can call and have the 
dress fitted in our workrooms. 

We hope we may be able to please you. 

Yours truly, (235 words) 
John Wanamaker. 

Why the hyphens in "made-to-order"? 

A little word like "too" is as much thrown into a sentence, 
often, as "therefore," but we do not set it off with commas when the 
.sentence is already divided up with commas that are more impor- 



204 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

tant. To avoid confusion, we often omit unimportant commas to 
give the important ones a chance to have their effect. 

The writer of this letter says "we will begin" because he wishes 
to indicate willingness or determination. 

As "John Wanamaker" stands for a great business organiza- 
tion, the pronoun "we" is properly used in place of "I." 

84 
Shogun, Kans., Jan. 10, 1919. 
Kansas City Supply House, 

Kansas City, Mo. 
Gentlemen : 

I have your catalogue, and have looked all through it to 
find the kind of gun I want, but it does not seem to be there. 
All the guns described in the catalogue are rifles, and I want 
a light shotgun — a good gun for little money. Do you have 
any guns of this kind? 

Do you sell furs? My wife wants to get some to use in 
making up a jacket. If you do not handle them, can you tell 
me where I can get them ? 

I shall be very much obliged if you will let me hear from 
you immediately. 

Very truly yours, (106 words) 

Martin Fisher. 

85 
(Letter-head) Jan. 16, 1919. 
Mr. Martin Fisher, 

Shogun, Kans. 
Dear Sir: 

We suspect from your letter of January 10 that you do not 
have our regular winter catalogue, and take pleasure in send- 
ing you a copy under separate cover. Probably the catalogue 
to which you refer is our special catalogue of Winchester 



TALKING IN A LETTER 205 

rifles in which no shotguns are described. If you will look 
on pages 95-96 of the catalogue we are sending you, you will 
find a number of shotguns described and quoted: Some are 
priced very low indeed, yet we fully guarantee everything 
we sell, and you may be sure that you will find nothing better 
of its kind on the market. 

We do not handle furs not made up into garments. For 
the skins we would refer you to Back, Becker & Co., 107 
Michigan St., Chicago. If you ask them for "scraps," and 
tell them exactly what use your wife wishes to make of 
them, possibly you can get small pieces at a low price which 
will serve as well as expensive whole skins. 

We hope you will look our catalogue through carefully 
at your leisure, for we know you will find many splendid 
bargains. We carry only new and high-class stock, and 
permit our customers to return, at our expense, any article 
they do not find exactly as represented. If at any time you 
get. any goods that do not please you, you can return them 
and we will refund your money, less freight or express 
charges. We are always pleased to answer questions, and 
will do everything in our power to aid you. 

We trust we may have the pleasure of hearing from you 
again very shortly. 

Yours truly, (277 words) 

Kansas City Supply House. 

A hyphen between page numbers indicates continuous reading 
from the first page to the last, including all pages between. When 
there are no intervening pages, a comma may take the place of the 
hyphen. If one page is omitted, its place must be indicated by a 
comma between the next preceding and the next following page. 



EXERCISES IN BUSINESS LETTER WRITING 



Suggestions on Correspondence Practice 

There are three essential elements in letter writing: 

1. Correct form (margins, indentions, neatness, etc.). 

2. Stating the facts with extreme accuracy. 

3. Appealing to human nature so that a customer w T ill 
feel that he or she is well treated. 

1. Form is purely a matter of fashion or style, and 
changes as do the styles in women's dresses. For example, in 
England the salutation following the name of a business 
firm is "Dear Sirs" ; but in the United States "Gentlemen" 
is the form generally used. Only a few years ago the first 
Line of the body of the letter usually began just below 
the end of the salutation, so that the first paragraph was 
indented more than other paragraphs ; today the prevailing 
style is to begin the first paragraph of a letter with the 
same indention as all other paragraphs. To keep just even 
with progressing fashion, neither ahead nor behind, is the 
desirable course to follow. 

2. Success in letter writing depends first of all upon get- 
ting the facts stated w r ith extreme accuracy and complete- 
ness, giving just what the customer wants, and leaving out 
all that he would not care to know. 

3. To the outside observer, business letters seem merely 
formal statements. In reality they are very nicely adjusted 
appeals to real men and women, to get very definite results. 
They must make a customer feel like doing what is asked. 
That is the salesmanship element, and it can come only from 
developing the imagination, which sees the customer sitting 
by the desk of the writer, and writing to him as one would 
talk face to face, and talk to win business. 

209 



210 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

How to Study Business Correspondence 

Letter writing is the simplest form of composition, once 
the business facts are understood ; and every person, whether 
entering business or not, will gain immeasurably from being 
required to stick to exact facts. 

First Step : Mastering the Form. Copy the model letters 
in the book exactly as to margins, indentions, punctuation, 
etc. Then exchange papers and check up point by point. 

Second Step: Writing a Letter from Dictation in the 
Right Form. The teacher may dictate another letter, which 
the pupils write according to the model. This may then be 
compared with the model point by point. 

Third Step: Deciding What to Say — Oral Preparation. 
Turn to the first exercise and imagine that you are going to 
respond to it in person. Walk up to the desk of the teacher 
and make the best oral application for a position that you 
can. Or suppose that you are a customer giving an order 
and must state exactly what you wish, detail by detail, to a 
clerk who is slow in understanding you ; or that you are a 
clerk answering in person the question of a customer who has 
called. When you can talk it you can write it. Study the 
outline of '"Facts Required in Different Types of Letters/' 
on the following page. 

Fourth Step: Expressing Yourself in Writing. Observe 
exactly all the details given in the model letters and then 
state the facts worked out for the original letter as closely 
as possible in the same style and with the same complete- 
ness of detail, but make the expression natural. 

Fifth Step: Checking up. When letters are ready, pupils 
should exchange papers and check up one thing at a time — 
first the facts, then the form, then the wording, spelling, and 
punctuation, according to the "check up" in the test on the 
following pages. 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 211 

Centering a Typewritten Letter 

A letter should be centered slightly above the middle of 
the square space below the printed letter-head, which will 
average fifteen typewriter lines. If the printed head is 
longer or shorter than this, a corresponding change should 
be made in the number of blank lines dropped down. 

The good appearance of a letter depends largely on getting 
the margins proportioned according to artistic principles. 
In general, the solid body of the letter should form a rect- 
angle of about the same proportion as that of the letter- 
head paper itself, which is usually 8| by 11 inches, except 
that the rectangle of typewriting runs across the sheet in- 
stead of up and down. 

Note on Pen- Written Letters 
Pen-written letters necessarily cover more space than 
typewritten ones, address lines frequently have to be short- 
ened to keep the balance, and margins are always narrower. 
Three-quarters of an inch is about the proper margin on the 
left-hand side. Measure this with a ruler and do not 
trust to the eye alone. The margin on the right-hand side of 
the page may be less. The name and address on pen-written 
letters should never be squared up in the block style. 

Facts Required in Different Types of Letters 
Letter of Application: 

1. Name and address of firm applied to. 

2. Name and full address of applicant. 

3. Is position wanted clearly stated? 

4. What reasons are stated why applicant should be given 
position? What training for work? What experience? Or 
what proof that applicant can do the work? What successes 
won in business or in school? School record? 



212 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

5. What facts about applicant are called for in advertise- 
ment? Or what facts would firm be likely to want to know? 
Sex? Age? Nationality of parents? Living at home or 
boarding? Salary wanted? 

6. Ambitions for future? Attitude toward the work? 
Promises? 

7. Is letter too short or too long? Points omitted? Are 
all necessary points explained clearly and briefly? Is each 
subject in a separate paragraph ? Do any points need more 
emphasis? How? 

Letter Ordering Goods: 

1. Name and address of inquirer. 

2. Name and full address of person giving order. 

3. What items are ordered? Is each fully described? 
Sizes? Pieces? Numbers? Grades? Prices? 

4. Where and how are goods to be sent? 

5. How are goods to be paid for? If charged, how was 
credit arranged? If check is inclosed, is cost of exchange 
added? U. S. money order? Express money order? Bank 
draft? Express C. O. D.? Freight C. O. D.? How man- 
aged? 

Letter Answering Inquiries: 

1. Name and address of inquirer. 

2. Mention date of letter answered in natural manner. 

3. Exactly what questions were asked in the letter of 
inquiry ? 

4. What is the exact direct answer to each question? 
What added facts might be suggested? 

5. Is each fact required in answer so clearly stated that 
any one can understand it? 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 213 

6. Is the manner of statement kindly and sympathetic? 
Is it tactful? 

7. Is letter too long or too short? Are important points 
properly emphasized, so that reader will catch them quickly? 
Are definite answers given to all questions? 

Letter Answering Complaint : 

1. Name and address of person complaining. 

2. Is complaint about goods ordered, shipped, and paid 
for? Or what? Just what was the original transaction, 
and when completed? 

3. Exactly what is complained of? 

4. Was fault in the business firm, in the freight or express 
company, or in the personal ideas of the complainer? 

5. If firm was responsible, what adjustment should be 
made? If transportation company was responsible, what 
can be done? If customer is dissatisfied, what concession 
can firm afford to make? 

13.. Is the letter in every case apologetic and sympathetic? 
7. Will the customer feel well treated after all is said and 
done? 

The National Business Ability Test on Letter Composition 

It is very desirable when we begin a course of study to 
know pretty definitely how much we know already and how 
much we have yet to learn. By way of checking up our abili- 
ties let us take the following test and check it ourselves ac- 
cording to the directions which will be found immediately 
after it. 

Test in Letter Writing. Write a letter of application for 
any actual position you believe you can fill acceptably, about 
100 words, fully describing your (1) education, (2) experi- 
ence (including amateur undertakings), and (3) ambitions. 



214 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Special attention should be paid to the neatness and form of 
the letter, spelling, punctuation, and paragraphing, as well 
as to the choice of words and smoothness of expression. 
State (4) age, (5) sex, (6) color, (7) physical strength, and 
(8) appearance. 

DIRECTIONS FOR GIVING AND GRADING TEST 

(To the Teacher: Distribute paper of full letter size, 8£ 
by 11 inches, ruled but without any vertical red line on it, 
and also pens and ink. A test of this kind must always be 
written in ink, on one side of the paper only. Eead the 
following directions step by step, waiting after each for the 
members of the class to do as directed.) 

Step 1. Write at the extreme top of your sheet of paper, 
for reference only and not as part of the letter, your name, 
school, class, and date, all on one line. On the next space 
that might be called a line write "Checked by" at the extreme 
left-hand side. On the third space that might be called a 
line, at the extreme left, write "Rechecked by." 

Step 2. Now, ignoring what you have written at the top, 
you are to write this letter of about 100 words (the exact 
count is not important), placing it properly on the sheet, 
giving your own home address and the present date. Ad- 
dress the letter to an actual business house or person you 
know, giving the correct address. Make your answers apply 
truthfully to yourself as you are now, not to an imaginary 
person such as you may be later. I cannot answer any 
questions to help you compose your letter. You must use 
your own best judgment, without wasting time. You will 
be allowed half an hour to write this letter. 

(If there is not time to check the letters in the same period, 
they may be collected and given out at a future period for 
checking. If the checking is not finished in one period, the 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 215 

papers may be taken up a second time and later given out 
again to the persons who were previously at work upon 
them. Correction of letters by this method through the 
pupils is slow, but it furnishes very valuable instruction. 
Unless done thoroughly, it has little value.) 

Step 3. See that you do not have your own letter. Write 
your name in the space after "Checked by." 

Step 4- First of all we will see if the eight facts called 
for in this letter have been covered. I will write them on 
the board three at a time and give you a brief explanation of 
what you ought to find stated in the letter you have before 
you. 

You know what education is. Any reference to the class 
in school in which a person actually is w T ill cover that. 

"Experience" means anything outside of class work which 
might fit for this job. It might be work at home nights or 
Saturdays, or it might be such things in school as managing 
a ball team, editing a school paper, or doing any of those 
things that are not class work. These latter would be called 
"amateur undertakings." Setting up a wireless station 
would be an amateur undertaking. 

"Ambitions" refer to anything that the person wants to 
do beyond the immediate thing he applies for. For exam- 
ple, if you want a job so that you can earn money to go to 
school next fall, that is an ambition. Or you may w r ish to go 
to school so as to become a teacher or anything like that in 
the future. You do not have an ambition to get this job. 

Now look through the letter before you carefully, and 
wherever you find anything about "education," write in the 
left-hand margin a figure "1" ; where you find anything about 
"experience," write a figure "2"; where you find anything 
about "ambitions," write a figure "3." The order does not 
matter. 



216 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Step 5. The fourth fact to cover is age; the fifth, sex 
(whether boy or girl) ; and the sixth, color. 

If application has been made for a position as office boy or 
the like that shows it is a boy. Merely signing a girl's name 
or a boy's name is not sufficient. There must be something 
in the letter that distinctly shows that the person who wrote 
the letter noticed No. 5 and tried to cover it. 

"Color" may be covered either by saying one is white or 
negro, or giving the complexion as light or dark, blond or 
brunette. 

Where you find each of these facts covered, write the cor- 
responding number in the left-hand margin, regardless of 
order. 

Step 6. No. 7 is "physical strength," which refers to 
health, or general ability to do the job and keep at it day 
after day. A boy who plays football may be assumed to be 
strong, etc. 

No. 8, "appearance," may be covered by saying one is tall 
or short, heavy or small, or by giving height or weight, or 
anything like that. 

Mark the numbers for these in the same way. 

Step 7. Now let us check up two more facts. Is the 
address given by the writer at the top of the letter suffi- 
ciently complete so that a letter sent to the person at that 
address could be delivered? In a city there would have to 
be a street and street number, a building, or the like, but in 
a small town only the town and state would be required. If 
this address is sufficient, write in the left-hand margin a 
figure "9." 

Step 8. A second fact that should be covered is whether 
the position wanted is clearly stated. Many boys and girls 
apply for positions without stating what the positions are 
so that business men may know what they are applying for. 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 217 

If the position wanted is clearly stated, make a figure "10" 
in the left-hand margin opposite the beginning of the letter. 

Step 9. Xow we will count up all the facts covered in 
the letter to see if there are ten in all. If this count shows 
that any are omitted, write below "Kechecked by" in the 
upper left-hand corner "Om." for "Omissions," followed 
by the number of points not covered. If there are no omis- 
sions, write u Om. 0." 

Step 10. We will now take up the correctness of the let- 
ter one point at a time. Do not look ahead, but keep your 
mind fixed on the point we are talking about until all of 
us have finished that point. Then we will go on, all together, 
to the next point. 

pupil's check-up on letter-writing 

Form of the Letter. Make a small, heavy cross in the 
margin at either end of the line for any error in that line. 

Margins. Is the left-hand margin not less in width than 
one joint of the finger or more than two joints — three quar- 
ters of an inch to an inch and a half, and fairly straight? 
Is the right-hand margin not less than a quarter of an inch, 
so that not more than three lines on a page come near 
touching the edge of the paper? (These margins are for 
handwritten letters on letter-size paper. Modify them for 
note size, or typewritten letters, which require larger mar- 
gins.) Is the letter crowded too high on the sheet, or is it 
placed too low? Are the paragraphs indented half an inch 
to one inch and a quarter? 

Date line. Are a street name and a street number re- 
quired? Do they come first, with a comma only at the end 
of the item ? Is St., Ave., or Boul. capitalized and followed 
by a period if abbreviated? Is there no period after 16th 
or the like? Is Sixteenth capitalized if spelled out? 



218 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Do the city and state come next, with comma between 
them, and with a comma after the period for the abbreviation 
of the state, if it is abbreviated? Make a cross for any 
item omitted or out of order. 

Does the date come last, as April 25, 1917, with comma 
after 25 and period after 1917, but no comma after April? 

Is the whole heading of the letter well balanced, and 
placed to the right-hand side of the page? 

Name and address. Is the name of the person to whom 
the letter is written just flush with the margin? Is it 
followed by a comma? Is the address on the next line 
indented as a paragraph (exception for typewritten letters, 
where address may be flush with margin), followed by a 
comma, periods after all abbreviations, St., etc., capital- 
ized? Does the third line have a double indention? Is 
there a comma after the city and a period after the state 
even if it is spelled out in full (no other punctuation) ? 

Salutation. Is the salutation flush with the margin? 
Followed by a colon (never a comma or semicolon) ? Sir 
beginning with a capital letter? Dear Sir for a man, Dear 
Madam (never Madame) for a woman, Gentlemen (never 
Dear Sirs) for a firm or institution, Ladies for a firm of 
women? Does the body of the letter start as a paragraph, 
on a new line (not farther to right than other paragraphs, 
an old-fashioned style) ? 

Complimentary close. Does it start at least a third of 
the way across the page, and not more than two-thirds of 
the way, on a separate line? Does it begin with a capital 
letter, and is it followed by a comma (no word capitalized 
except the first) ? Is there any apostrophe about "Yours"? 
Is it formal, such as "Yours truly," "Respectfully yours" 
when the opening is formal, or an informal close like "Sin- 
cerely yours," used only in letters of a friendly and pergonal 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 219 

nature? Does the name come on a line below, starting a 
little to the right of the beginning of the complimentary 
close? (It may or may not be followed by a period.) If a 
woman's name is preceded by Miss or Mrs., is the title in 
parentheses? 

Step 11. Wording op the Letter. Let us now examine 
the choice of words and phrases to see if they are all 
natural and correct. It is an example of poor wording 
to say "I am of the age of 13 years" (two ofs), "I have 
had some experiences" (plural instead of the singular ex- 
perience), "I seen your add in the paper" (a bad error of 
grammar like / seen, or add with double d instead of adv. 
or ad. as an abbreviation or short form for advertisement). 
Let pupils raise their hands and ask about any wording on 
which they are doubtful till all have marked the wording to 
their satisfaction. Write w in the margin for each example 
of poor wording. 

Step 12. Spelling. Let us read the letter carefully 
through again to see if the spelling of any word is doubt- 
ful. If so, the pupil must be sure to ask about it. 

Step 13. Punctuation. Let us now look the letter 
through especially for punctuation. Write p in the margin 
for each example of wrong punctuation. 

Are any sentences run together with only a comma be- 
tween ? 

Are there any compound sentences with and, or, or but 
which should have a comma before the conjunction? Are 
there any compound predicates, the subject not expressed 
before the second verb, where there is a comma before and 
or or that should not be there? 

Are there any subordinate clauses which should be set 
off by commas? 

Are there any subordinate clauses set off by commas which 



220 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

should not be so set off, because they are short and closely 
connected with the main clause in meaning, or are essential 
to the meaning? 

Are there any words thrown in which should be set off 
by commas? 

Are there any words, phrases, or clauses in series which 
should be separated by commas, including a comma before 
the and or or connecting the last two items of the series? 

Are there any addresses in the letter, of which the items 
of street and street number, town, and state should be 
separated by commas? 

Are there any commas anywhere that are not needed? 

Are there any proper nouns or proper adjectives like 
English, America, or the like, which are not capitalized? 
Are there any common nouns capitalized that ought not to 
be capitalized? 

Let pupils look carefully for each one of these items of 
punctuation, one item at a time, and ask questions if in 
doubt. 

Step 14- Record. Write at the top the number of errors 
under each head, — Facts Omitted, Form of the Letter, Word- 
ing, Spelling, Punctuation, and then add all together for 
Total Errors. When tabulating for a class make a list in 
two columns, — Facts Omitted and Total Errors (which in- 
cludes Facts Omitted). 

Grammar school graduates average total errors 10 in this 
100-word letter, selected beginners in business houses 7 er- 
rors, and graduates of commercial high schools 5 errors. 

How to Fold a Business Letter 

Irregular or careless folding of business letters is such bad 
style and so annoying to careful business men that unusual 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 221 

pains should be taken to get this right. The following di- 
rections apply to the standard business letter, which is about 
8Jj by 11 inches (the best size to put in a typewriter). 

1. The letter lies before you on your desk. Holding the 
letter firmly down on the desk with the left hand, use the 
right hand to grasp the bottom and carry it up within a half 
or a quarter of an inch of the top (not quite to the 
top). 

2. -While the letter is held firmly in place, crease the fold 
across the middle carefully so as not to pull the letter out 
of position. 

3. Turn the right-hand side around toward you so that it 
will become the bottom, and while holding the letter on the 
desk with the left hand, use the right to raise the bottom 
and place it about one-third of the way toward the top 
(the left-hand edge of the open letter), and crease the fold 
carefully. 

4. Then bring the top down so that the edge already folded 
comes right at the new crease, and press the fold down 
neatly. 

5. Kaise the folded letter in the right hand so that the 
crease of the last fold will be downward and the edge of the 
paper in toward the palm of the hand. Take the envelope 
in the left hand and insert the letter, which is ready to be 
sealed. 

The stamp should be placed squarely and neatly in the 
upper right-hand corner. 

Addressing Envelopes 

In addressing envelopes, remember that you should study 
the convenience of the postal clerk, who has to handle thou- 
sands of letters with great rapidity. 

1. Make a separate line for the name, the city, the state, 



222 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

and the street address, and keep each of these items well 
separated from the others, since one clerk reads the state, 
another reads the city, another the street address, and only 
the mail carrier or person delivering the letter ever looks 
at the name of the person to whom the letter is written*. 

2. Do not abbreviate a short state, and write the state 
on a separate line, not on the same line with the city. After 
"New York City" the state is conveniently indicated by the 
abbreviation "N. Y." by way of distinction. 

3. Many prefer to place the street address in the lower 
left-hand corner, since this prevents crowding or confusion. 
This is especially desirable when the address consists of more 
than four items. 

Always begin the address so there will be plenty of room 
and no line will run too close to the right-hand side of the 
envelope. 

Never write anything in the middle space of the envelope 
at the top where the postmark should come. Always leave 
plenty of room near the stamp for the postmark. 

Omitting punctuation at ends of lines is a growing custom. 



Messrs. Marshall Field & 


Co. , 


State and Washington 


t Sts • | 


Chicago, 




Illinois . 





EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 223 



Mr. James Gour 


ley 


Care 


Dr. H. 


C. 


Paddack 


2477 


Grand 


Avenue 


New York C] 


Lty 




N. Y. 









Exercise: Each of the letters in the following exercises should 
be properly folded and inserted in a correctly addressed envelope. 

Facsimile Letters to be Answered 

To the Student : 

Do you expect to hold a position 
after you graduate where you will have letters to 
write? How much salary do you hope to earn when 
you have had time to work up to your best? Do you 
wish to learn to write letters that will make 
your employer say, "There is a young man or woman 
who knows his business ; he writes the best let- 
ters of any one in my employ"? 

The Teacher. 

(See next page.) 



224 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Notation: Refer to Chap. I, Letters 1 to 5, pp. 121-123. An- 
swer the questions in this note as briefly and clearly as possible. 
In the reply, use your teacher's name. Notice that when a name 
is used you omit "to." Observe also that this is a "note" and not 
a "letter." Date each note. 

In this exercise, don't be afraid of expressing your honest feel- 
ings, and don't say anything that sounds absurd. Be true to the 
facts in regard to yourself. 

Questions (Answers found in Chap. I of Part III) : 
Would you use the short method of writing, a date on a regu- 
lar letter? Should "a. m." and "p. m." be written in small 
letters or capitals? Is it necessary to use these abbrevia- 
tions after every figure indicating an hour, when several are 
given together? What punctuation mark should you place 
between figures indicating hours and minutes? Is "Miss" 
an abbreviation? Should it be followed by a period? 
Should "o'clock" be written with a capital letter in the mid- 
dle of a sentence? If hours and minutes are given in a let- 
ter, when should they be written out in words instead of 
figures? What punctuation mark follows the salutation or 
name of person addressed in a note? 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 225 

f|mutg $Ltn*& <$fyri#itatt gk&g&tinli&n 

£tiUitfttttg, |Ja* 

Nov. 10, 1921. 

Mr. John M. Jones , 

Principal Quaker City College, 
Philadelphia, Pa. 
Dear Sir : 

My father, who is living in Philadelphia, 
wishes to talk with you in regard to the chances 
for my future advancement, and what studies will 
best fit me for a position that will pay a good 
salary. If you will let me know when you can be 
found at your office, he will call on you in 
Philadelphia. 

Very truly yours,. 

Notation: In reply to this letter state that Mr. Jones will be 
glad to see Mr. Blaisdel at his office any day except Saturday, pref' 
erably in the afternoon between two and four o'clock. State briefly 
his pleasure in talking the matter over and advising to the best of 
his ability. See Chap. II, Letters 6-9. 

Try to write a letter that will make Mr. Blaisdel feel friendly. 
Study how to put that friendly spirit into your letter. 



226 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Questions (Answers found in Chap. II of Part III) : 
What four items should appear in every date-line of a letter? 
Where are these items to be placed on the letter page? How 
are they separated? Where are commas not used? When 
streets are numbered, how should they be written? Why 
is nd or st not required after the day of the month ? 

Where do you place the name and address of the person 
to whom a business letter is addressed? Is it proper ever 
to omit the address? How should the name; address, and 
salutation be arranged? What is the salutation? 

Is it proper to use two titles with one name? What excep- 
tions ? When may no title be used ? How do you punctuate 
the name and address? What should be the last punctua- 
tion mark after the address? What is the best punctuation 
mark after the salutation? 

What is the proper salutation for a man? A company? 
A married woman ? A young girl ? When the name is used 
in the salutation, where should the full name and address be 
placed? What exception to this rule is common? Why is 
"Dear Friend" objectionable? 

What two ways are there of beginning the body of the 
letter? Do you think it is the beginning of a paragraph? 
What is the preferred indention? 

Why is it not proper to say "I will be glad" ? Is "he will 
be glad" any better? 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 227 

THE HOME DELICACIES COMPANY 

Restaurant— Catering 

Aurora, Illinois 

June 10, 1921. 

Messrs. J. & J. Wanamaker & Co., 
State, Washington, and Lake Sts., 
Chicago, 111. 

Gentlemen : 

I ordered a sideboard, a dining table, and 
six dining-room chairs of you ten days ago and 
was told they would be sent without any delay. 
I have not yet received them, and am very greatly 
inconvenienced by not having them. Will you not 
look into the matter immediately? I shall cer- 
tainly appreciate any special effort you may make 
to hasten the delivery to the utmost, as I have 
arranged for a dinner party day after tomorrow, 
and must cancel the invitations unless I can have 

these things. 

Yours truly, 

Manager 

Notation: Apologize, say the teamsters' strike has interfered 
with deliveries, and promise that the furniture shall be delivered the 
following day. See Cbap. Ill, Letters 10-13. 

Make your apology profuse, and show that you mean it. Try 
to make the lady feel you really mean it. 



228 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Questions (Answer in Chap. Ill of Part III) : Why is 
it objectionable to close a business letter with some conven- 
tional phrase ending with "I am" or "I remain"? What 
are the proper complimentary closes for business letters? 
For letters of pure friendship? What words in the compli- 
mentary close are to be capitalized ? Why should letters not 
be signed on the typewriter? Why is "by" preferable to "per" 
signed on the typewriter? Why is "by" preferable to "per" 
before the name of some one signing a firm name? Is this 
firm name usually typewritten ? Is a postscript treated as a 
paragraph ? Where should the full name and address of per- 
son written to be placed when there is a postscript — above 
or below the postscript? 

How should a woman sign her name when writing to a 
stranger if she is married? How if she is unmarried? In 
writing to a woman, how should you begin a letter? In writ- 
ing to a young girl would you say "Dear Madam"? Is it 
proper to sign any letter "Mrs. Deland" without a first name 
or parentheses around "Mrs." ? When may a woman use her 
husband's name instead of her own? Give a reason for 
making each paragraph in each of the letters in Chapter III. 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 229 



Philadelphia, New York, and Chicago 

Chicago 

July 19, 1920. 
The Barrett Company, 
Mishawaka, Ind. 
Gentlemen : 

We thank you for your letter of the 15th 
quoting prices on No. 3 Peerless gas ranges . If 
you will give us ninety days on them, you may con- 
sider this letter an order for one hundred. We 
presume you will store them for us and ship as we 
may need them. Kindly let us know by return mail 
if this is satisfactory. 

Very truly yours, 

J. & J. Wanamaker & Co., 

Mgr. Stove Dept. 

The Barrett Company 

Mishawaka, Ind. 

July 21, 1920: 
Messrs. J. & J. Wanamaker & Co., 

Chicago, 111. 
Gentlemen : 

We accept your proposal of July 19, and have 
entered your order for one hundred No. 3 Peerless 
gas ranges for $750.00, terms payment in full 
ninety days from date of invoice, stoves to be 
shipped as you may order within six months. 

Very truly yours, 

THE BARRETT COMPANY, 

Secretary 

(See next page.) 



230 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Notation: Write a similar series of letters, the first, a re- 
quest from the manager of the hardware department for quotation 
on a carload of granite enamel saucepans, assorted styles and sizes. 
In reply offer the carload for $400 spot cash, giving the price as 
$500 for delivery before June 1, 1922. To this write from Wana- 
maker's, saying offer of $400 will be accepted for shipment Oct. 1, 
payment on receipt and examination of the goods. Reply saying 
order has been entered on those terms. In each acknowledgment 
give date of letter answered. (See Chap. IV.) 

Questions (Answers in Chap. IV of Part III) : Why is it 
desirable to mention date of letter you are answering? Is 
it always necessary? What usual stereotyped forms are ob- 
jectionable? Why do business men try to avoid them? How 
would you begin a letter in an easy and natural way? How 
should a list of goods ordered be arranged? What do para- 
graph indentions indicate as to the meaning? When should 
you make a paragraph and when should you not do so? 
Mention words that are to be avoided in letter writing. How 
did these words come to be used commonly in business let- 
ters? Why are business men now trying to avoid them? 

State some of the special abbreviations for states recom- 
mended by the Post Office Department. Why are these new 
abbreviations better? What is the object in putting your 
own name and address on the outside of an envelope? Is it 
allowable to pencil a little note on a newspaper sent at news- 
paper rates? What is the penalty? Can you send more 
printed matter for one cent than you can written matter for 
two? What is the rate on foreign letters? Name some 
foreign countries to which the letter rate is 2c instead of 
oc. How remember to put a 5c stamp on foreign letters? 

What special words may be capitalized in a particular 
business letter that would not be capitalized in other letters ? 
Why should we hyphenize "price-list" ? In what kinds of 
letters should two ciphers be placed after figures denoting 
sums of money, to indicate "no cents"? 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 



231 



YOUNG LADY— FOR OFFICE WHOLE- 
sale mail order house ; must be rapid 
and accurate worker ; good chance to 
learn general business ; exceptional op- 
portunity for advancement to right party. 
Detmer Woolen Co., 200 Monroe-st., 7th 
floor. 

STENOGRAPHER — BRIGHT HIGH 
school graduate, for position in large 
office; must have at least six months' ex- 
perience; write fully, giving age, ex- 
perience and education ; salary to start 
$18. Address G A 310, Tribune. 

STENOGRAPHER AND ASSISTANT 
bookkeeper — Young woman ; $15 to 
start ; opportunity for advancement for 
one who is accurate. Address S L 238, 
Tribune. 

YOUNG MAN— BRIGHT, COMPETENT 
to extend bills in large wholesale 
dry goods and notion house. Replying 
give age, nationality, experience, and 
name of last employer, and salary ex- 
pected. Address E N 584, Tribune. 

YOUNG MAN— EXPERT AT FIGURES; 
good penman, of irreproachable char- 
acter, for confidential position in a well 
established house ; answer to receive 
reply must state age, reference, and 
wages expected. Address J W 293, 

Tribune. 

STENOGRAPHER— GIRL JUST GRAD- 
uated from school to learn office work ; 
need -not take dictation rapidly ; must 
use machine well, be of pleasing appear- 
ance ; hours 9-12, 1-5 ; state salary ex- 
pected ; permanent position. Address 
E 449, Tribune. 

ASSISTANT BOOKKEEPER — YOUNG 
man ; must be good at figures and ac- 
curate ; fine opening for right party; $18 
to start ; state age, . experience, refer- 
ences. Address E N 380, Tribune. 

GIRL— WHO CAN OPERATE TYPE- 

writer ; shorthand not necessary ; fine 
opportunity for advancement ; state age, 
education, experience, and salary to be- 
gin. Address T P 254, Tribune. 

STENOGRAPHER AND TYPEWRITER 

— must be young man of good family, 
well educated, experienced in keeping 
files, rapid writer, and wiring worker; 
hours 8:30 to 6. Make application in 
own handwriting, stating experience and 
naming former employers. Address 
W 296, Tribune. 

ASSISTANT BOOKKEEPER — BRIGHT 

young lady ; must be good penman and 

correct at figures ; good opportunity for 

advancement. Address T O 259, Tribune. 



BOOKKEEPER — BRIGHT YOUNG 
man for branch office work outside 
Chicago ; must be reliable and come well 
recommended ; give age and experience 
in full. Address E N 325, Tribune. 

BOOKKEEPER — MAN, CAPABLE 

double entry ; one familiar with pur- 
chase and general ledger accounts ; give 
references, experience, and salary wanted. 
Address S 522, Tribune. 

STENOGRAPHER — BRIGHT, INTEL- 

ligent young woman ; must also attend 
to customers ; downtown house furnish- 
ing goods. Address E 360, Tribune. 

O L E R K — FIRST-CLASS, EXPERI- 
enced, under 25 years of age ; must 
be first-class, rapid penman, and have 
some office experience ; give full details 
in your reply. Address W 417, Tribune. 

MAN— BRIGHT, ENERGETIC, FAIRLY 

well educated ; not too young for special 
work ; six hours daily ; experience unnec- 
essary if willing to learn. M. J. TAY- 
LOR, 169 Dearborn-st. 

STENOGRAPHER AND ASSISTANT 
bookkeeper — Bright young woman ; one 
of limited experience will be acceptable, 
provided she can qualify for more re- 
sponsible position soon ; state salary re- 
quired. Address J J 248, Tribune. 

YOUNG LADY— DESIRABLE PER. 

manent place for one who can write 
neatly and handle figures correctly ; 
painstaking accuracy essential ; state age, 
experience, and salary required ; work 
is in the line of orders, bills, and assist- 
ant cashier. Address E P 55, Tribune. 

YOUNG MAN — NEAT, BRIGHT, IN 
real estate office ; must have some 
knowledge of electric bell repairing and 
run elevator one hour daily ; salary $14. 
Suite 511, 42 River-st. 

BOY— YOUNG, REMINGTON OPERA- 

tor, and to assist in general office 
work ; state age, experience, references, 
and wages required. Address T 463, 
Tribune. 

YOUNG MAN — STENOGRAPHER IN 

downtown office ; short hours : state 
age, experience. present employment, 
and salary* Address W 454, Tribune. 

GIRLS — EXPERIENCED IN FILING 
letters and general office work ; also 
girl over 16 to learn general office work. 
5th floor, 95 E. Kinzie-st. 



232 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Notation: Write letters applying for such positions as you 
are yourself actually competent to fill. Do not introduce imagin- 
ary details. Stick to facts. 

Questions (Answers in Chap. V of Part III) : When 
should you write a short letter applying for a position and 
when a long letter? Why is it important to write on good 
paper and in a neat style? What form may be used in an- 
swering a "blind" newspaper advertisement? 

Is it allowable to use "Mess." for "Messrs."? What title 
should be prefixed to the name of a magazine? In what cases 
is it proper to use a comma immediately after a period? 

Why is "Dear Sirs" for the plural to be avoided? Are 
abbreviations to be used promiscuously in a letter? What 
special abbreviations are allowable? 

What is the proper spirit to show in making application 
for a position? Discuss this question and illustrate it in 
detail from the poor letter in Chapter V and the rewritten 
letter. 

Punctuation: What are the leading rules for the use of 
capital letters? What is the difference between a common 
noun and a proper noun? May the same word be a proper 
noun at one time and a common noun at another? Give 
three examples of common nouns used as proper nouns and 
requiring to be capitalized. When should the word "com- 
pany" be capitalized? Give an example of capitalizing an 
ordinary word merely to emphasize it. What adjectives 
should be capitalized? Are all abbreviations capitalized? 
Give ten that are and three that are not (Part I, Sees. 1-5). 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 233 

Marshall Field & Company 

State, Washington, and Randolph Sts., 
CHICAGO 

July 1, 1921. 

Mr. Plimpton: 

Have checks made out for my signature 
to cover the following bills and write suitable 
letters to go with each: 

Parker , Bridget & Co . , raincoats , $47 . 00 ; 

J. & J. Wanamaker & Co. , New York, $7.95 ; 

Peter Dunne, books, $7.50. 

Send a subscription for the Bookkeeper 
and Stenographer, in the name of the house, $1. 

Write to Brentano's, New York, asking 
if- they have any books on the use of card systems, 
and say that if they have anything really good 
they may send with bill. 

Send $1 subscription to the General 
Retailer, New York, for the ensuing year. 

Have these ready for me at 5 o'clock. 



Auditor 



Notation: Write each of the six letters directed in this mem- 
orandum, referring to Chap. VI, Letters 21-24. Do not put on 
the signatures, but the firm name may be written in each case, the 
initials or name of the manager to follow (see Letters 13 and 15). 



234 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Questions (Answers in Chap. VI of Part III) : How 
would you send a sum of money less than one dollar? How 
would you send an even dollar? Why cannot stamps be 
sent to foreign countries? How can you send stamps so 
they will not stick together? How would you send amounts 
larger than one dollar? What is the objection to a private 
check? What is the advantage of an express money order? 

Call at the post office and get a U. S. Money Order applica- 
tion blank and bring it to the class properly filled out. 

Where do you place a money order or check when inclosing 
it in a letter ? 

Is a word like "Publishers" after a firm name a second 
title in violation of the rule against duplication of titles? 
How is it regarded? How do you justify the last phrase of 
Letter 21, in that it seems to be a sentence yet has no sub- 
ject or predicate? Is omission of the subject and predicate 
objectionable in this case? Why do you capitalize "Maga- 
zine" in "The Munsey Magazine"? Should names of maga- 
zines be put in quotation marks or underscored? When is 
it proper to omit all marks? 

Punctuation : Explain and illustrate what is meant by a 
"group" of words. Give an example of a group of words con- 
stituting a complete principal sentence. Give an illustra- 
tion of a group of words constituting a subordinate sentence 
or clause. Give an illustration of a group of words constitut- 
ing a prepositional phrase. Give an illustration of a group of 
words constituting a participial phrase. What special 
words can you remember which are thrown into a sentence 
and do not unite with others to form groups? Why are 
groups separated by commas? (Eefer to Part I, Pars. 5-7, 
13-14, for information about phrases, participles, etc., if 
these rules are not already entirely familiar.) 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 235 

zyY<e€VL t^S<wtf; \0<c£uj ^/Y. *^f . 

n*eott>£ced <n<G£ -awen <s(J-c. t^S-cntA ww scxSw-eddj 

€£*Z€C tjr €*£<c// ^MX<W t^A^-^T, tjs <p-e/ ^A^m . 

Notation: This order cannot be filled because sizes are not 
given. Supply the missing information, and rewrite the letter, ar- 



236 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

ranging it like Letter 26, putting in approximate prices and inclos- 
ing money order. Also write a letter from Wanamaker & Co. in 
reply to this letter as it stands, asking for the necessary informa- 
tion. (See Chap. Vtl.) 

Questions (Answers in Chap. VII of Part III) : How 
should orders for goods be arranged? Is a list necessary 
when only two items are ordered? What is most necessary 
in giving an order for goods? What things must always be 
stated? What do you say about payment? What do you 
say in regard to way to make shipment? What special de- 
tails are always necessary in ordering goods? 

When a list of goods ordered is given, what punctuation 
mark should you use after each item? What does this punc- 
tuation mark mean? When prices are given is this punctua- 
tion mark needed? What other punctuation mark, if any, 
should be used? What punctuation mark is used after "the 
following 1 '? What does this punctuation mark mean? In 
a list of figures in a column, where should the dollar sign 
be placed? 

Punctuation: What is the commonest punctuation mark? 
What is it chiefly used for? Does it have a meaning of it- 
self? Referring to the different groups of words treated in 
Part I, point out examples of each kind of group in the col- 
lection of "Examples" given in Pars. 7-17. Are all these 
groups set off by commas? Illustrate the kinds of groups of 
words which should be set off by commas. What is a com- 
pound sentence? Complex? What are the coordinate con- 
junctions? What are the principal subordinate conjunc- 
tions? (See Par. 11 ? Part I. ) Use each in a sentence. When 
are subordinate clauses to be set off by commas? Drop out 
the subordinate clauses from each illustration in the text- 
book and show the effect on what remains. 




44 RUE DES PETITES ECURIES 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 237 

BROADWAY, 4TH AVE., 9TH AND 10TH STS. 

%ew yozk 

3/9/19. 
Mr. Johnson: 

Write the Barrett Company, Mishawaka, 
and hurry them up on that order for granite sauce- 
pans ordered June 1. We want a 500 assorted lot 
just as soon as they can get them to us. Write 
the Boston Refrigerator Co. , 12 Atlantic Ave. , 
Boston, that we shall cancel our order for 25 
porcelain-lined refrigerators Nos. 2 and 3 if they 
do not ship by Wednesday. Write also to the 
Blakely Printing Co. telling them we must have 
all proofs of the catalogue in hand by the 10th 
without fail. 

Purchasing Manager 

Notation: Attend to these directions, studying Chap. VIII, 
Letters 27-30. 

Additional Exercise: Write replies to these letters from all 
the firms addressed. 



238 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Questions (Answers in Chap. VIII of Part III) : What 
is a "hurry-up" letter? Who is hurried irp? What is the 
best way to force prompt deliveries as far as a letter will do 
any good? Does it do any good to get angry? What does 
"slightly irritating" mean? When should "Co." ordinarily 
be abbreviated and when spelled out in the name of a firm? 
Give an example of the word abbreviated for a special rea- 
son. Should a sentence ever begin with a sign or figures? 
Why is it necessary to give all details in regard to an order 
w T hen writing to inquire about it? 

Punctuation: What is a second use of the comma? What 
is a participle? A participial phrase? Give three illustra- 
tions. What is a prepositional j)hrase? Give an illustration 
of such a phrase out of its natural order. Give three illus- 
trations of nouns in apposition. Give three illustrations of 
nouns used independently in address. Make a list of inde- 
pendent adverbs that may be set off by commas. Give three 
illustrations of parenthetical expressions to be set off by 
commas. (See Part I, Sec. 13-15.) 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 239 

Ralston Health Sfyoemakezs 

WHO MAKE SHOES 
THE PEOPLE WANT 

Campello, Mass. 

Feb. 3, 1919. 

Mr. Jackson: 

Remind Mrs. J. M. Farley, 13 Plymouth 
Court, Worcester, that her account is two weeks 
overdue. 

Write J. M. Reasoner, 1325 Colonial 
Bldg. , Boston, that we must know what he is going 
to do about his account for $39.40, now six months 
overdue — a stiff letter. 

If Eben M. Bassett, Harvard, Mass., 
can't pay his account in full, see if he can't 
arrange to pay so much a month. 

Write the Microcosm Company, Century 
Bldg., Rutland, Vt., that we shall have to have a 
settlement in ten days or we shall bring suit, 
but try to induce them to pay up. 

Credit Manager, 

Notation: Write these letters after studying carefully Chap. 
IX, Letters 31-38. Credit letters must be written with very great 
care, each letter in a different tone according to the conditions. 
Study carefully how to give this different tone to different letters. 



240 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Questions (Answers in Chap. IX of Part III) : What 
style is most useful in collecting money? Should a collec- 
tion letter usually be long? What kind of customer should 
be threatened? What kind of customer should be coaxed 
with sympathetic arguments? What is the danger in writ- 
ing collection letters ? 

Why capitalize "City" in "New York City"? When 
should the two ciphers following figures indicating dollars 
be used? 

Punctuation : What is a "series" for purposes of punctua- 
tion? Give an example of a series of nouns; a series of ad- 
jectives ; a series of phrases ; a series of clauses. What three 
conjunctions may connect words in a series? How is a se- 
ries punctuated? If all the words are connected by conjunc- 
tions, are commas to be used? When is a comma to be used 
before a conjunction? (See Part I, Sec. 16.) 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 241 

1 3 M ISSION STR EET 

SAN FRANCISCO 



May 3, 1919 

Henry R. James, Esq/", 

Chronicle Bldg. , San Francisco, Cal. 
Dear Sir : 

I think my late husband had placed his 
life-insurance policy in your hands for safe- 
keeping. If he did, will you kindly send it to me 
at once, or make an appointment for me to call at 
your office and get it? 

Yours very truly, 



Notation: Write to this lady that she is mistaken in suppos- 
ing her husband left his life-insurance policy in the hands of the 
lawyer. Say that he has some other papers of her husband's which 
may be of value or interest to her and will be glad to turn them 
over at any time. Also make a polite offer of services. (See Chap. 
X, Letters 39-43.) 



242 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Questions (Answers in Chap. X of Part III) : Why do 
letters to ladies differ in any respect from letters to men? 
How should you address an unknown woman? When you 
are acquainted with a lady, how may you address her? Why 
should social forms be used in letters to ladies? Why is 
extra formality appropriate when a man writes to a lady 
of his acquaintance? 

What is the best abbreviation for "advertisement" ? Is 
any abbreviation for this word usually proper in a letter? . 

Punctuation: Illustrate how a comma may be used to 
indicate an omitted word. How are dates to be punctuated? 
Does a comma follow r the name of a month ? The day of the 
month? The year? How are addresses punctuated? Does a 
comma follow T the house number? The town? The state? 
When is a comma used before a quotation ? When is a 
comma and dash preferable? A colon? Give your own 
illustration of ench. What is the general rule for the use of 
the comma? Are commas used more or less commonly than 
years ago? What commas may you expect to find in books 
by Scott or Dickens? In modern magazines? In modern 
newspapers? (See Part I, Sec. 17.) 

Review. Formulate for yourself the four principal rules 
for use of commas. What two additional uses can you men- 
tion ? 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 243 



HENRY R. JAMES 

ATTORNEY AT LAW 

CHRONICLE BLDG., SAN FRANCISCO 



June 17, 1919. 



Mr. J. R. Moulton, Trustee, 

The Golden Gate Trust Company, 
San Francisco, Cal. 

Dear Sir : 

1 have received the following letter 
from Miss Elizabeth Kennedy, 10 Myrtle Street, 
Sacramento : 

"Remembering your kindness in the past, 
Mamma and I always feel at liberty to come to you 
in time of trouble. I think we have drawn our 
allowance from Papa's estate up to the first of 
September. We need about a hundred dollars more. 
Mamma is far from well, and we wish to go up to 
the mountains for a few weeks in July and August. 
Is there any way in which we can get the money we 
need on account of the September payment ?* 

I inclose my personal note for one hun- 
dred dollars as collateral security, and would 
ask you to advance this amount on Mrs. Julia Ward 
Kennedy's account, making check payable to her. 

Very truly yours, 



*j?/C'&r< 



Notation: Answer Miss Kennedy's letter in the name of Mr. 
James, saying that he has written to the trustee of the estate at 
the bank to advance the money needed, giving his personal note as 
collateral security, and if Mrs. Julia Ward Kennedy will send him 
her note or will call with it, he will have the money ready for her. 
Write also letter from Mr. Moulton to Mr. James in reply to the 
latter's letter, complying; also letter refusing for technical legal 
reasons. (See Chap. XI.) 



244 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Questions (Answers found in Chap. XI of Part III) : 
How do letters from lawyers, doctors, and literary men differ 
from those of regular business men? What forms are com- 
monly used in writing to business friends? Should a form 
of friendship be used in closing a business letter to a friend? 
How do you justify "Cordially yours" in a regular business 
letter? How are adjectives connected with participles? 
When an adverb precedes a- participle, is a hyphen needed? 

When a woman writes to a stranger, how should she indi- 
cate whether she is married or single? Why should she do 
this? Is this form necessary when the person to whom she 
w T rites know r s her? Why would you capitalize "Mother" in 
"to Mother and me" and not in "to my mother and me"? 
Is "dear" capitalized after "My"? 

Why is "Hospital" capitalized in Letter 52? When should 
"secretary" be spelled out in signing a letter? 

Punctuation: What is the only position in a business let- 
ter where a colon is required? What two positions require 
semicolons? In Letter 44, why should you not use a semi- 
colon before "but" instead of a comma? Why no comma be- 
fore "and" in the next line? What would be the effect of 
omitting the comma in the last line? In Letter 45, would 
you use a comma in the first sentence? If so, why? Does 
the dash indicate an abrupt transition in the next to the 
last sentence in this letter? Why is a comma required in 
the last sentence? In Letter 46, what group of words is 
thrown in for sake of explanation? Are the relative clauses 
in the first sentence restrictive or non-restrictive? Why is a 
comma used before "and" in the second sentence? Explain 
the comma in the first sentence of Letter 47. Explain each 
comma in the last sentence in this letter. Explain what the 
rule for the comma is illustrated in the first sentence of 
Letter 48; what rule in the last sentence. What is the 
rule for setting "therefore" and "however" off by commas in 
Letter 52? 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 245 

WAYNE PAPER MILLS 

HARTFORD CITY, IND. 

June 5, 1919. 



Dear Mr. Jones : 

I have just left my position with Jen- 
kins & Co. because my salary was five weeks in 
arrears and I began to feel I should never get 
paid for my work. Oughtn-' t I take some legal ac- 
tion at once to secure my rights? Will you please 
advise me? 

Mamma is anything but well, she has 
worried so much over my affairs. I have a tem- 
porary position with the Wayne Paper Mills. 



Sincerely, 



Walter Jones, Esq., Attorney, 

Chronicle Bldg. , Chicago, 



Notation: In reply to this letter say that some action certainly 
should be taken, and if Miss Bailey will call the next day between 
two and three, Mr. Jones will talk the matter over with her and 
help her to decide what ought to be done. 

Write a long, friendly, sympathetic letter, supposing Mr. Jones 
to be an old friend of Miss Bailey's. (See Chap. XII, Letters 53- 
59.) 



246 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Questions (Answers in Chap. XII of Part III) ; What is 
the difference between talking and letter writing? How can 
you gain ease in letter writing? Point out the bantering 
phrases in Letter 57. What is the difference between over- 
familiarity and vulgarity, and a tone of pleasant and allow- 
able banter? What is the difference between "now" as an 
expletive and "now" as an adverb of time? How are the two 
words to be punctuated? How are titles of books or maga- 
zines regularly indicated — in what two ways? When may 
these marks be dispensed with? What then tells us we have 
a title? Why are "good-sized" and "cheap-looking" hyphen- 
ated? What is the dash used for? Illustrate by Letter 58. 

Punctuation: Explain each comma in Letters 53-59 by 
one of the various rules for the use of the comma. Point out 
several single words and short phrases "thrown into" a sen- 
tence. Find several "explanatory" clauses. Find two or 
three "restrictive" clauses which are not to be set off by 
commas. In Letter 56 two parts of a compound sentence are 
separated by a semicolon : before what conjunction is a semi- 
colon common? In Letter 57 is "now" an expletive or an 
adverb of time? Why is no semicolon used before "but" in 
the latter part of this letter? What are the subject and 
predicate of the last sentence in this letter? Or do we have 
a group of words which do not form a sentence and so are 
incorrectly used? Why are there no ciphers after "$2" in 
Letter 58? Why is not "50 cents" written "fifty cents"? 
Give a reason for the use of the dash in this letter. How 
many explanatory phrases do you find in this letter set off by 
commas? Do you find any explanatory phrases not set off 
by commas? Why are they not set off? In Letter 57, why 
is a comma used before "and" in the group of words "hand- 
some, generous, and rich"? 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 247 

Danville, Conn., June 4, 1919. 

Messrs. J. & J. Wanamaker & Co., 
New York City, N. Y. 

Gentlemen : 

I am interested in photographic goods, 
and if you have a catalogue in this line I should 
be glad to see it. What prices do you make on 
Eastman 4x5 dry plates? What are your prices for 
developing and printing? Do you guarantee work 
of this sort to be satisfactory? 

Your courteous information will greatly 
oblige 



Yours truly, 
I %^/j/C^dd 1 ^yc^^dd^e ^/vk}t2s<x<eip, 



Notation: Send catalogue, price 45c a doz. on Eastman 4x5 
dry plates, 6c for developing and same for printing, work guaran- 
teed; mounting, etc., additional. Write a cordial letter with a view 
to securing this customer. (See Chap. XIII, Letters 60-67.) 

Questions (Answers in Chap. XIII of Part III) : What 
is the most important thing in a ''buying" letter? How long 
should it be? What are the requisites of a "selling'' letter? 
In what kind of firm names should "Co." be spelled out? 
Is "No." as an abbreviation always to be capitalized? Why 
is a hyphen required in "4-in."? How many articles does it 
take to make a "line"? Can one article properly be referred 
to as a u line" ? Why is no comma required after "we are" ? 



248 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Why is "anywhere" one word and "any one" two? What 
part of speech is "any"? When an adjective comes before 
an adverb or participle or other word which it cannot 
modify, how do we treat it? How should cents be written 
in business letters when figures are used and "no dollars" 
appear in connection? Why is this form preferred? 

Punctuation: In a business letter, when do we use fig- 
ures and when spell out words indicating numbers? Show 
how confusion is avoided in the first sentence of Letter GO by 
separating the different groups of w r ords by commas. Why 
is a comma used after "On receipt of this order"? Is this 
phrase in its natural position in the sentence? What is the 
subject of the sentence? Why is there no comma after "cus- 
tomer" and before "when" in the next to the last sentence? 
Account for the commas in Letter 61. Why is not a semi- 
colon used before "but" in Letter 62? Why is not "also" set 
off by commas in this letter, as "however" or "therefore" 
might be? Why is there no comma after "oblige," before 
"yours truly"? What is the object of "oblige"? How would 
omission of commas in the sentence beginning "We also ship 
C. O. I)." in Letter 63 affect the meaning? What simple 
purpose do the commas in this sentence serve? Point out a 
restrictive clause in Letter 64 which does not need to be set 
off by a comma or commas. How would the meaning be af- 
fected if it were set off? Are "or" and "nor" disjunctive con- 
junctions like "but," which may be preceded by a semicolon, 
or are they more like "and"? Why no commas in the last 
sentence of Letter 64? Why are figures used in place of 
spelled-out words in Letter 65? Why no commas in the last 
sentence though an adverbial clause opens the sentence out 
of its natural order? Account for each comma in Letter 
66. Why is there a comma before one "and" and not before 
the other in Letter 67? 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 249 

G. B. STEWART W. F. HARRAH T. P. SHARNACK 

Harrah (5L Stewart Mfg. Co. 

WHOLESALE MANUFACTURERS OF 

BROOMS, WHISK BROOMS, ETC. 

LONG DISTANCE TELEPHONES 514-516-518 EAST COURT AVE. 

DES MOINES, IOWA 

Feb. 5, 1919. 

Messrs. J. & J. Wanamaker & Co., 

New York City, N. Y. 
Gentlemen : 

I want a pair of harness for carriage 
use. What have you in this line at a fair price? 
Let me know by return mail. 

Yours truly, 

Secretary. 



Notation: Write a long letter, send circulars, and quote prices 
$65, $85, and $160, calling attention in each case to the picture of the 
harness in the circulars. (See Chap. XIV.) 



250 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Questions (Answers in Chap. XIV) : To what classes of 
people as a rule may you write a long letter? To what 
classes is a short letter more appropriate? Why is a long 
letter necessary in some cases and a short letter absolutely 
required in other cases? Why are figures used in Letter 69? 
Why is a hyphen required in "high-colored" and not in 
"highly colored"? How should an angry and irritating letter 
be answered? Is there any exception to this rule? 

Punctuation: Why is no comma used after "As soon as 
we know the sizes desired" in Letter 68? Why no comma 
after "we are"? Why should there be a comma between "to 
receive" and "today" in the first sentence of Letter 70? 
Is not "today" an adverb modifying "receive," and are ad- 
verbs usually separated from the verbs they modify? Does 
"at the latest" modify "receive" or "today"? Which might 
it seem to modify if there were no comma before "today"? 
Is the phrase "today at the latest" thrown into the sentence? 
Point out a restrictive clause in the first sentence of Letter 
72. Is the relative clause in the first sentence of Letter 76 
restrictive or explanatory? Why do you think it explana- 
tory? What is the rule for deciding such a question? Why 
is a comma used before "and" in the first sentence of the 
third paragraph of Letter 76? How would omission of the 
comma change the meaning? 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 251 

The Evening Record 

Traverse City, Michigan 
J. W. HANNEN, Editor and Manager 



Jan. 12, 1919. 

Messrs. J. & J. Wanamaker & Co., 
Chicago, 111. 

Gentlemen : 

I want to buy a refrigerator, and should 
like to have the prices of your porcelain-lined. 
Have you a catalogue of goods of this class? Or 
can you send me descriptive circulars? I want 
something at a moderate price, but must have some- 
thing really good. Your courtesy in giving me 
full information will be appreciated. 

Yours very truly, 



<cc?ivi<e'ri 



Notation: Fully describe the two-door white enamel refrigera- 
tor; state that a constant circulation of air is secured by the arrange- 
ment of the interior, that every part is easy to clean and convenient; 
say that the railroads are all introducing this style of refrigerator 
for their buffet cars, and it is the leader in popularity. Inclose a 
circular. (See Chap. XV.) 



252 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Questions (Answers in Chap. XV) : What is the impor- 
tant thing in answering inquiries? How should you think of 
the customer? What may you assume he already knows? 
Why is more care necessary in explaining in a letter than in 
a conversation ? Should a letter answering inquiries be long 
or short? Why do you think a busy business man would 
read a long letter answering inquiries when you know 
he wouldn't read a long letter soliciting an order? Should 
"Miss" ever be used in opening a letter? Why? What is 
the objection to "hereby" and "herewith" in a business 
letter? When a customer does not know what he or she 
w r ants, wiiat should you do in answering the letter? What 
is the value of having so many paragraphs in the rewritten 
letter? When is it proper to make every sentence a para- 
graph? When you do not know whether a woman is mar- 
ried or single, how do you address her? Why is it important 
to give small orders a great deal of attention? What is the 
difference between a contraction and an abbreviation? 
When should nd or st be used after the figures indicating 
days of the month and when are they to be omitted ? When 
is "dear" to be capitalized in a salutation and when written 
with a small letter? What is the objection to words like 
"attached" and "valued"? Why is a comma wrong after 
"we are"? 

Punctuation: In Letter 77 as rewritten, why is th used 
after "8" in the first sentence? In the second paragraph, 
why do we have "ladies' and gentlemen's" rather than "lady's 
and gentleman's"? Why is a semicolon rather than a comma 
required before "also" in the fourth paragraph? Give a 
reason for making each paragraph in Letter 78 as rewritten. 
Why is "Nocturnes" capitalized? Why is "page 2" written 
with a figure? How is k '2" usually written when standing 
alone in the bodv of a letter? 



EXERCISES IN LETTER WRITING 253 



$essemer's Farm 
Hamilton, Ohio 



Jan. 4, 1919, 



Messrs. J. & J. Wanamaker & Co. 
Mail Order Department, 
Chicago, 111. 

Gentlemen: 

I have purchased a great many dollars 1 
worth of goods from you and have been very well 
satisfied on the whole, but the last six orders 
I have sent you have all been filled incorrectly. 
I ordered a bath-heater on the 10th of December, 
and when it arrived the other day, after a long 
delay, I found the gas-mixer was missing. The 
strainer for the nickel-plated washbowl waste- 
pipe, concerning which I have written you several 
times, has not yet been received. I ordered some 
galvanized iron pipe fittings which have just 
arrived, and I find you have sent black fittings 
instead of galvanized. I will use these black 
fittings, but will ask you to refund the differ- 
ence in price and send the missing gas-mixer for 
the bath-heater and the strainer for the waste- 
pipe by return mail. 

Yours truly, 



-ew^if 



<edd-e<m<e'7<< 



Notation: Give him the credit that he asks (3 %-in. gal. tees 
paid for at 10c each, black tees at 6c each sent), and send the gas- 
mixer and strainer at once. Apologize, and assure him he will not 
have this annoyance in the future. Talk to the man as if he were 
in your office. (Chap. XVI.) 



254 STANDARD TEST ENGLISH 

Questions (Answers in Chap. XVI) : What is the proper 
style for a business letter? Are long sentences or long para- 
graphs permissible? What is the difference between con- 
versational English and business English? What is the dif- 
ference between colloquialisms and slang? Give an example 
of permissible colloquialisms. Give an example of objection- 
able slang. In Letter 79 pick out the colloquialisms. Are 
there any slang phrases in this letter? Why does this letter 
contain but one paragraph ? Do many business letters con- 
sist of a single paragraph? Why are hyphens required in 
"made-to-order" ? What is the difference in meaning be- 
tween these words joined by hyphens and not joined by 
hyphens? Why is it not permissible to say "we will have 
pleasure"? Give an instance in which "we will" is perfectly 
correct. 

Punctuation: Why are there no commas at all in the 
closing sentence of Letter 80? Give your reasons for the 
comma used in the first sentence of Letter 81. Why is 
"high-grade" hyj)henated? Why is the word k 'Wanamaker" 
quoted? Why is "however" set off by commas in Letter 83 
and not "too"? Why is there no comma after the adverbial 
clause "As soon as we hear from you" in the next to the 
last paragraph of Letter 83 ? Give a reason for the use of the 
dash in the first paragraph of Letter 84. Is there a restric- 
tive clause in the second sentence of Letter 85? Why should 
this not be set off by commas? What is the meaning of the 
hyphen in j)ages "95-96"? What other mark might be used 
in this case? If a page were left out and we wanted to indi- 
cate all the other pages from 95 to 99, how could we do it? 
Why is the word "scraps" quoted ? 



<«c 



e p 



